IBM Printer 24 User Manual

IBM Network Printer 24

IBM Network Printer 24PS

User's Guide

IBM

S544-5378-01

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IBM Network Printer 24

IBM Network Printer 24PS

User's Guide

IBM

S544-5378-01

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note!

Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices”

on page xv.

Second Edition (January, 1997)

The following paragraph does not apply to any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow

disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

Changes are made periodically to this publication.

Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your

locality. If you request publications from the address given below, your order will be delayed, because publications are

not stocked there.

A Reader’s Comment Form is provided at the back of this publication. You may also send comments by fax to

1-800-524-1519, by e-mail to [email protected], or by regular mail to:

Department H7FE Building 003G

IBM Printing Systems Company

Information Development

PO Box 1900

Boulder CO USA 80301-9191

IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any

obligation to you.

Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is

subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Statement of Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Energy Star . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Communications Statements for Class A

Communications Statements for Class B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Safety Notices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

About This Book

Conventions Used

Related Publications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

Chapter 1. About Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Describing Printer Features and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Describing Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Identifying Printer Parts and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Upper 500 Sheet Paper Tray (Tray 1)

Lower 500 Sheet Paper Tray (Tray 2)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2000-Sheet Paper Input Drawer (Tray 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2000-Sheet Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

US 9 Foot Line Cord

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

US 6 Foot Chicago Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Stand

Envelope Feeder

Printer Memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adobe PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IPDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Card for Ethernet (10Base2 or 10BaseT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Card for Token Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Twinax SCS Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coax SCS/DSC/DSE Interface

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ordering Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Describing Resident Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Obtaining Printer Drivers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Network Printer Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Obtaining Network Printer Manager Utility

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Network Printer Resource Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Obtaining Network Printer Resource Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Print Services Facility Software with IPDS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Obtaining Adobe Acrobat Portable Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Understanding the Operator Panel Indicator Lights

Using the Operator Panel Keys

Navigating Menus — Two Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example 2 — Reducing Toner Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performing Other Common Operator Panel Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Binding for Duplex Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a Stored Page (PCL5e Jobs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a List of PCL5e Fonts

Printing a List of PostScript Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a List of IPDS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjusting Print Density (Printing Darker or Lighter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Power-Savings (Sleep Mode) Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Language Shown on the Display Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Understanding Common Messages

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . .

Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paper Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuration (Config) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Configuration (Memconfig) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parallel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCL Menu

PS Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Token Ring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ethernet Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coax SCS Menu

Twinax SCS Menu

Coax Setup Menu

Twinax Setup Menu

Coax DSC/DSE Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IPDS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machine Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Language Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes

Selecting Paper and Other Printable Material

Selecting Paper from Printer Drivers and Datastreams

Selecting Output as Face Up or Face Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defining the Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Loading Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Letterhead and Prepunched Paper

Loading Paper into Trays 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper into 2000-Sheet Input Drawer - Tray 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper into Auxiliary Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Envelopes into Envelope Feeder

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Paper Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Selecting The Default Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Selecting The Default Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Defining the Auxiliary Tray Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Defining the Envelope Feeder Envelope Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Turning Tray Switching On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Turning Auxiliary Tray Manual Feeding On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Stapling Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Locating Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Removing Paper Jams from the Fuser Area

Removing Paper Jams from the Imaging Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Removing Paper Jams from Paper Trays 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Removing Paper Jams from 2000-Sheet Input Drawer - Tray 3 . . . . . . . . 123

Removing Paper Jams from the Auxiliary Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Removing Paper Jams from the Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Removing Paper Jams from the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Removing Paper Jams from the Face-Up Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Removing Paper Jams from the Face-Down Tray

Removing Paper Jams from the 2000-Sheet Finisher

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Ordering and Replacing Supplies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Changing the Toner Cartridge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cleaning the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Cleaning the Anti-Static Teeth

Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Cleaning the Registration Roller Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Replacing a Staple Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Performing a Stapler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Handling Static Sensitive Devices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Installing the Paper Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Installing the Face-Up Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Locating Options on the Printer Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Installing SIMM and Hard Drive Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Installing a SIMM

Installing a Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Installing the Options Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Installing the Network Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing a Network Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Installing the Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Installing the Duplex Unit Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Installing the 2000-Sheet Input Drawer (Tray 3) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Installing the 2000-Sheet Finisher Option

Unpacking the 2000-Sheet Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Attaching Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Attaching the Printer Delivery Slot Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Attaching the Guide Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Connecting I/O and Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Installing a Staple Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Installing the Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Chapter 8. Managing Printer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Downloading and Managing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Describing Printer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

DRAM Memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Estimating Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Using Memory Reduction Technology with Page Protection . . . . . . . . . . 200

Chapter 9. Setting Printer Network Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Defining Network Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Using the Operator Panel Keys to Set Network Addresses

. . . . . . . . . . 202

Setting IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Setting the Locally Administered MAC Address (LAA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Appendix A. Troubleshooting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Locating Printer Serial Number and Machine Type

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Service Messages

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Appendix C. Solving Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Print Is Too Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Toner Spots on the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Repetitive Marks on the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Random Deletions or Light Areas on the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Vertical Marks on the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Vertical Bands of Deletions or Light Areas on the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Entire Print is Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Entire Print Is Blank

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

White Spots Within Black Image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Printed Image Rubs Off or Smears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

vi User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Print Is Damaged

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

The Printed Image Is Blurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Preparing to Install the Usage Kit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Changing the Auxiliary Feed Pick-up Roller and Separation Pad . . . . . . . . . 242

Changing the Fuser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Changing the Transfer Charging Roller Assembly

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Changing the Pick-up and Feed and Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Appendix E. Answering Your Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Appendix F. Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Printer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Toner Cartridge Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Tables

1. 2000-Sheet Finisher Capacity-Standard Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. 2000-Sheet Finisher Capacity-Large Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Optional Feature Descriptions and Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Supplies Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Supported Media Types and Sizes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Printable Area and Margins

7. Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

8. Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Contents vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

viii User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figures

1. Printer with Optional Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Printer with Optional 2000-Sheet Input Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Printer with Optional 2000-Sheet Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Printer Parts and Locations—Front and Right View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Key Printer Parts and Locations—Rear and Left View

. . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Key Printer Parts and Locations-Optional 2000-Sheet Finisher . . . . . . .

7. IBM Network Printer 24 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. IBM Network Printer 24PS Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Operator Panel Indicator Lights

10. IBM Network Printer 24/24PS Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. Operator Panel Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. Standard and Duplex Paper Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

13. Standard and Envelope Feeder Paper Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

14. 2000-Sheet Paper Input Drawer Paper Path

15. 2000-Sheet Finisher Paper Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

16. Controller Card Locations for SIMMs and Hard Drive Options . . . . . . . 154

17. Key Envelope Feeder Parts and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

18. 2000-Sheet Input Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

19. Finisher Parts and Accessories

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Statement of Limited Warranty

The warranties provided by IBM* in this Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to

Machines you originally purchase for your use, and not for resale, from IBM or an IBM

authorized re-seller. The term “Machine” means an IBM machine, its features,

conversions, upgrades, elements, or accessories, or any combination of them.

Machines are subject to these terms only if purchased in the United States or Puerto

Rico, or Canada, and located in the country of purchase. If you have any questions,

contact IBM or your re-seller.

Machine: Network Printer 24 and 24PS

Warranty Period: 12 months

Contact your place of purchase for warranty service information.

Production Status

Each Machine is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts

(which perform like new parts). In some cases, the Machine may not be new and may

have been previously installed. Regardless of the Machine's production status, IBM's

warranty terms apply.

The IBM Warranty

IBM warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship

and 2) conforms to IBM's Official Published Specifications. IBM calculates the

expiration of the warranty period from the Machine's Date of Installation. The date on

your receipt is the Date of Installation, unless IBM or your re-seller informs you

otherwise.

During the warranty period, IBM or your re-seller will provide warranty service under the

type of service designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering

changes that apply to the Machine. IBM or your re-seller will specify the type of

service.

For a feature, conversion, or upgrade, IBM or your re-seller may require that the

Machine on which it is installed be: 1) the designated, serial-numbered Machine and 2)

at an engineering-change level compatible with the feature, conversion, or upgrade.

Some of these transactions (called “Net-Priced” transactions) may include additional

parts and associated replacement parts that are provided on an exchange basis. All

removed parts become the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM.

Replacement parts assume the remaining warranty of the parts they replace.

If a Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, IBM or your

re-seller will repair or replace it without charge. If IBM or your re-seller is unable to do

so, you may return it to your place of purchase and your money will be refunded.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you transfer a Machine to another user, warranty service is available to that user for

the remainder of the warranty period. You should give your proof of purchase and this

Statement to that user.

Warranty Service

To obtain warranty service for the Machine, you should contact your re-seller or call

IBM. In the United States or Canada, call your point of purchase or IBM customer

technical support at 1-800-358-6661 from 8:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m, Eastern Standard

Time. You may be required to present proof of purchase.

Depending on the Machine, the service may be

1. “Repair” service at your location (called “On-site”),

2. “Repair” service at one of IBM's or a re-seller's service locations (called “Carry-in”).

When a type of service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item IBM or

your re-seller replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours. The

replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order.

It is your responsibility to:

1. Obtain authorization from the owner (for example, your lessor) to have IBM or your

re-seller service a Machine that you do not own;

2. Where applicable, before service is provided:

a. Follow the problem determination, problem analysis, and service request

procedures that IBM or your re-seller provide,

b. Secure all programs, data, and funds contained in a Machine,

c. Inform IBM or your re-seller of changes in a Machine's location, and

d. Remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not under

warranty service. Also, the Machine must be free of any legal obligations or

restrictions that prevent its exchange; and

3. If the machine is not shipped in an IBM box, be responsible for loss of, or damage

to, a Machine in transit when you are responsible for the transportation charges.

Extent of Warranty

IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine.

Misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, improper

maintenance by you, or failure caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible

may void the warranties.

THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. HOWEVER,

SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES. IF

THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE

xii User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY

AFTER THAT PERIOD.

In Canada, warranties include both warranties and conditions.

Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the

above limitation may not apply to you.

Limitation of Warranty

Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on IBM's part (including

fundamental breach) or other liability (including negligence and misrepresentation), you

are entitled to recover damages from IBM. In each such instance, regardless of the

basis on which you are entitled to claim damages, IBM is liable only for:

1. Bodily injury (including death), and damage to real property and tangible personal

property; and

2. The amount of any other actual loss or damage, up to the greater of $100,000 or

the charge for the Machine that is the subject of the claim.

Under no circumstances is IBM liable for any of the following:

1. Third-party claims against you for losses or damages (other than those under the

first item listed above);

2. Loss of, or damage to, your records or data; or

3. Economic consequential damages (including lost profits or savings) or incidental

damages, even if IBM is informed of their possibility.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential

damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which

vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

Statement of Limited Warranty xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

xiv User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notices

References in this publication to IBM products, programs or services do not imply that

IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any

reference to an IBM licensed product, program, or service is not intended to state or

imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally

equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual

property rights may be used instead of the IBM product. Evaluation and verification of

operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM,

is the user's responsibility.

Any performance data contained in this document was obtained in a controlled

environment based on the use of specific data. The results that may be obtained in

other operating environments may vary significantly. Users of this document should

verify the applicable data in their specific environment. Therefore, such data does not

constitute a performance guarantee or warranty.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this

document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these

patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Corporation, IBM

Director of Licensing, 506 Columbus Ave., Thornwood, N.Y. 10594 U.S.A.

Trademarks

The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other

countries or both:

AIX

Application System/400

AS/400

IBM

Intelligent Printer Data Stream

IPDS

OS/2

OS/400

Personal System/2

Print Services Facility

PS/2

PSF

WIN-OS/2

The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies:

Acrobat

Adobe Systems, Inc.

Apple Corporation

Adobe Systems, Inc.

Hewlett Packard Co.

DPTek

Macintosh

PostScript

PCL5e

TonerMiser

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Windows

Microsoft Corp.

Energy Star

The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR Computers program is a

partnership effort with manufacturers of data processing equipment to promote the

introduction of energy-efficient personal computers, monitors, printers, fax machines,

and copiers to help reduce air pollution and global warming caused by electricity

generation.

IBM Printing Systems Company participates in this program by introducing printers that

reduce power consumption when they are not being used. As an Energy Star Partner,

IBM Printing Systems Company, has determined that this product meets the Energy

Star guidelines for energy efficiency.

Communications Statements for Class A

When either the 2000-sheet input drawer or 2000-sheet finisher feature is installed, the

printer will create a Class A system that is not to be operated in a Class B environment.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class

A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is

operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,

in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet

FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference

caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized

changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications

could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

xvi User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Canadian Department of Communications compliance statement: This equipment

does not exceed Class A limits per radio noise emissions for digital apparatus, set out

in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications.

Operation in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV

reception requiring the owner or operator to take whatever steps are necessary to

correct the interference.

Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du Canada:

Cet équipement ne dépasse pas les limites de Classe A d'émission de bruits

radioélectriques pour les appareils numériques, telles que prescrites par le Règlement

sur le brouillage radioélectrique établi par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

L'exploitation faite en milieu résidentiel peut entraîner le brouillage des réceptions radio

et télé, ce qui obligerait le propriétaire ou l'opérateur à prendre les dispositions

nécessaires pour en éliminer les causes.

The United Kingdom Telecommunications Act 1984: This apparatus is approved

under the approval No. NS/G/1234/J/100003 for the indirect connections to the public

telecommunications systems in the United Kingdom.

Japanese VCCI Class 1 ITE Statement:

Communications Statements for Class B

IBM 4324-001

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class

B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and

on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Notices xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

Consult an IBM authorized dealer or service representative for help.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors (Institute of Electrical and

Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1284-1994 compliant) must be used in order to meet FCC

emission limits. The parallel cable is IBM Part Number 63H1994 or its equivalent.

Proper cables and connectors are available from IBM authorized dealers. IBM is not

responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than

recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to

this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority

to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Responsible party:

International Business Machines, Corp.

Old Orchard Road

Armonk, NY 10504

Telephone: 1-800-772-227

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Conformity Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive

89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to

electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy

the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the

product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

EU Conformity Statement: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European

standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical

environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed

communication devices.

German Conformity Statement:

Dieses Gerät erfüllt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse B.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement:

This Class B digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian

Interference-causing equipment regulations.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement sur

le matériel brouiller du Canada.

xviii User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The United Kingdom Telecommunications Act 1984: This apparatus is approved

under the approval No. NS/G/1234/J/100003 for the indirect connections to the public

telecommunications systems in the United Kingdom.

Japanese VCCI Class 2 ITE Statement:

Safety Notices

There are three levels of safety notices:

DANGER calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous

to people.

CAUTION calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people.

Attention calls attention to the possibility of damage to a program, device, system, or

data. Attention notices are located throughout this publication, but are not listed here.

Notices xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety Precautions

Electrical Safety

This printer is inspected and listed by recognized national testing laboratories, such as

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in the U.S.A. and Canadian Standards

Association (CSA) in Canada. Listing of a product by a national testing laboratory

indicates that the product is designed and manufactured in accordance with national

requirements intended to minimize safety hazards. IBM equipment meets a very high

standard of safety in design and manufacture. Remember, however, that this product

operates under conditions of high electrical potentials and heat generation, both of

which are functionally necessary.

Because the paper and toner used in the printer can burn, you should take normal

precautions to prevent fire. These precautions include common-sense measures, such

as keeping potentially combustible materials (for example, curtains and chemicals)

away from the printer, providing adequate ventilation and cooling, limiting unattended

operation, and having trained personnel available and assigned to the printer.

Laser Safety

This printer complies with the performance standards set by the U.S. Food and Drug

Administration for a Class 1 Laser Product. This means that the printer belongs to a

class of laser products that does not produce hazardous laser radiation in a customer

accessible area. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary

protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is

inaccessible or within Class 1 limits.

There are various tool-operated machine covers that should be moved, removed, or

replaced only by trained service personnel. There are no operator controls or

adjustments associated with the laser.

No operator maintenance is required to keep the product in compliance as a Class 1

Laser Product. No adjustments that affect laser operation or power are accessible to

the operator.

This printer is a Class 1 Laser Product that contains an enclosed Class 3B laser.

xx User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About This Book

This book is designed to help you use the Network Printer 24 and 24PS. It describes

how to:

Use the operator panel to navigate menus and control the printer

Load and select paper and other print materials

Clear paper jams

Change printer supplies

Install printer options

Troubleshoot printer problems

Understand messages displayed on the operator panel

Conventions Used

Names of keys on the operator panel and labeled printer parts are shown in bold

typeface. For example:

Press the Enter key.

Press Page Eject.

Set the front paper guide in the slot labeled LTR.

Tips for network administrators are shown in a box:

Network Administrator Tip

Suggestions or tips on improving printer performance are described in this box.

Notes are shown as:

Note: This note provides further explanation.

Important notes are shown in a box:

Important

Notes you must read that contain important information such as handling static

sensitive devices.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

xxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Related Publications

The following books contain information that relates to the printer:

IBM Network Printer 24 and 24PS: Quick Setup, G544-5375, describes how to set

up the printer.

IBM Network Printer 24 and 24PS: Safety Instructions, G544-5376, contains safety

notices in several languages.

IBM Network Printer 24 and 24PS: Service Manual, G544-5377, provides service

information for repairing this printer.

IBM Network Printers: PCL5e and PostScript Level 2 Technical Reference,

S544-5344, contains technical reference information about Network Printer 24 and

24PS PostScript and PCL5e support for this printer.

IBM Network Printers: IPDS and SCS Technical Reference, S544-5312, contains

technical reference information about Network Printer 24 and 24PS IPDS and SCS

support for this printer.

IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide, G544-5240,

describes how to configure the Ethernet and token-ring network interface cards

(this book is shipped with the feature).

IBM Network Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide, G544-5241, describes

how to configure the twinax and coax network interface cards (this book is shipped

with the feature).

xxii User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1. About Your Printer

This chapter provides a description of the printer features, optional features you can

order, supplies you can order, and how to obtain printer drivers and printer software.

Quick Reference

Below is a quick reference to common tasks:

Task

Where

Configuring printer network

addresses

Go to Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network Addresses” on page 201.

Changing the paper source from

the operator panel

Go to “Using the Paper Menu” on page 104.

Clearing paper jams

Cleaning the printer

Go to Chapter 5, “Clearing Paper Jams” on page 109.

Go to “Cleaning the Printer” on page 143.

Determining memory requirements

for data streams and optional

features

Go to Chapter 8, “Managing Printer Memory” on page 197.

Finding answers to commonly

asked questions

Go to Appendix E, “Answering Your Questions” on page 273.

Installing a usage kit

Go to Appendix D, “Installing the Usage Kit” on page 241.

Go to “Loading Paper” on page 88.

Loading paper

Ordering supplies

Go to “Ordering and Replacing Supplies” on page 139.

Go to “Changing the Toner Cartridge” on page 140.

Go to “Selecting Paper and Other Printable Material” on page 83.

Go to “Error Messages” on page 221.

Replacing the toner cartridge

Selecting paper for printing

Solving error messages

Solving print quality problems

Go to Appendix C, “Solving Print Quality Problems” on page 235.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Describing Printer Features and Options

This network printer offers a maximum of 24 pages per minute throughput for high

volume printing environments. The printer provides up to 3100 sheets of input capacity

and supports various sizes from B5 all the way up to ledger and A3 plus duplex and

finishing options. Simultaneous network and host connections, combined with auto-port

and data stream sensing make this the printer of choice for large workgroups.

Network environments require support of multiple printer data streams. The printer

supports PCL5e and, optionally, PostScript Level 2, and IBM's Intelligent Printer Data

Stream (IPDS) as well as SCS.

This printer supports bi-directional parallel, Ethernet, Token-Ring, Coax, and, Twinax

interfaces.

The bi-directional parallel interface is standard and two of the four optional attachment

cards can be simultaneously installed. This printer automatically switches among

printer data streams, interfaces, and networks.

With the installation of IBM's Network Printer Manager (NPM) utility, system

administrators can easily install, configure, monitor, and manage the printer from

remote locations. The NPM utility has been developed using the industry standard

System Network Management Protocol (SNMP) printer Management Information Base

(MIB) ensuring future support and compatibility.

Large workgroups sharing a network printer require heavy duty, high volume printing

with maximum forms handling flexibility. The printer meets these requirements.

The printer supports paper sizes from B5 all the way up to ledger and A3. In addition

to the broad range of paper sizes, output support can be expanded with the addition of

the 2000-sheet finisher option. With the combination of the large input and output

capacities, printing solutions exist for large print volumes and unattended environments.

Besides large capacity stacking provided with the 2000-sheet finisher, two additional

finishing features are provided: offset jogging and stapling. These additional

capabilities make sending multi-copy jobs to the printer easier than ever. For example,

the existing multi-step process of print, copy, and finish can be transformed into an

efficient print and finish one-step operation with the installation of optional features such

as the 2000-sheet input drawer and 2000-sheet finisher.

Figure 1 on page 3 shows the Network Printer 24 and 24PS with an optional printer

stand installed, Figure 2 on page 4 shows the Network Printer 24 and 24PS with an

optional 2000-sheet input drawer installed. Figure 3 on page 5 shows the Network

Printer 24 and 24PS with an optional 2000-sheet finisher installed.

User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Face Down Tray

Face Up Tray

Operator Panel

Auxiliary Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

Printer

Stand

c9pu302

Figure 1. Printer with Optional Printer Stand

Chapter 1. About Your Printer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Face Down Tray

Face Up Tray

Operator Panel

Auxiliary Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

2000 Sheet

Input Drawer

(Tray 3)

Figure 2. Printer with Optional 2000-Sheet Input Drawer

User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Upper

paper

access

cover

Upper

bin

Lower

paper

access

cover

Middle

bin

Lower

bin

Stapler

Figure 3. Printer with Optional 2000-Sheet Finisher

Chapter 1. About Your Printer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Describing Standard Features

Standard features of the printer include:

Heavy duty printing with a maximum print speed up to 24 pages per minute and a

maximum monthly usage of 100,000 single-sided pages.

High performance 66 Mhz processor.

Resolution of 600 dots per inch (dpi).

PCL5e support including 35 PCL Outline Fonts (Intellifont), 2 PCL Bitmapped

Fonts, and 10 PCL True Type fonts resident on the printer.

Multiple paper support up to A3 and Ledger size.

4 MB of printer memory. The 4 MB of DRAM memory enables fonts to be

downloaded to the printer and helps process print jobs. Additional DRAM and Flash

memory can be ordered to enable more fonts to be downloaded and to help

process large print jobs. For a detailed discussion of printer memory management,

see Chapter 8, “Managing Printer Memory” on page 197.

IEEE 1284 bi-directional parallel interface.

Two paper trays that can hold up to 500 sheets each. Paper tray 1 can hold 500

sheets of A4, B4, Legal, or Letter. Paper tray 2 can hold 500 sheets of A3, A4, B4,

Ledger, Legal, or Letter.

Auxiliary tray can hold up to 100 sheets. The auxiliary tray supports envelope and

paper sizes: A3, A4, B4, B5, C5, COM10, DL, executive, folio, monarch, ledger,

legal, letter, and statement. The auxiliary tray is also used to print labels and

transparencies.

Two output bins: one bin, called the face-down tray, can hold 500 sheets while the

other bin, called the face-up tray, can hold 100 sheets.

Printer drivers for a wide variety of operating systems including AIX, Macintosh,

OS/2, and Windows. See “Using Printer Drivers” on page 22 for detailed

information on printer drivers.

Energy Star compliant. This printer meets Environmental Protection Agency

standards for energy conservation. The printer can be set from the operator panel

to go into a power saving-mode (also called “sleep-mode”) that reduces power

consumption.

TonerMiser ** which reduces toner usage thus increasing the number of pages

you can print from a toner cartridge. (The TonerMiser feature is selected from the

operator panel as ECONO under the Configuration Menu's Quality settings.)

User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Identifying Printer Parts and Locations

The following illustrations and text describe key printer parts you use when performing

tasks such as adding paper, removing paper jams, and so on.

Printer Parts and Locations—Front and Right View

Figure 4. Printer Parts and Locations—Front and Right View

Chapter 1. About Your Printer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Full bin sensor

Indicates when the face-down output tray is full.

2. Face-down output tray

Holds approximately 500 sheets of paper delivered face down and collated.

3. Paper stopper

Aligns paper delivered into the face down tray.

4. Top cover

Open the top cover to access the toner cartridge, clear paper jams, and perform

maintenance.

5. Auxiliary output tray

Holds a variety of media such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and

transparencies. Holds a maximum of 100 sheets of paper.

6. Right cover

Open to remove paper jams.

7. Paper pick up cover

Used with the 2000-sheet input drawer to pass paper to the printer. This cover can

be opened to remove paper jams from the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3).

8. 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3)

Optional feature that holds up to 2000 sheets of paper for high-volume printing.

Printer sits atop the 2000-sheet input drawer.

9. 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3) adjusters.

Used to support the 2000-sheet input drawer and printer. Can be adjusted to

stabilize the printer. (Illustration also shows casters that enable the printer to be

rolled very short distances.)

10. Paper size indicator

Indicator that show paper size in the paper tray.

11. Paper input Tray 2

Holds 500 sheets of A3, A4, B4, Letter, Legal, or Ledger paper.

12. Power switch

Used to turn power on and off to the printer.

13. Paper size indicators

Indicators that show paper size in the paper trays.

14. Paper input Tray 1

Holds 500 sheets of A4, B4, Letter and Legal.

15. Front cover

Open to remove paper jams. Also opened to remove paper jams from the duplex

unit.

16. Operator control panel

Used for printer operation and status display.

17. Face-up output tray

Holds approximately 100 sheets of paper delivered face up and uncollated.

User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Parts and Locations—Rear and Left View

Figure 5. Key Printer Parts and Locations—Rear and Left View

Chapter 1. About Your Printer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Left cover

Open to access or install the optional duplex unit and also remove paper jams.

2. Face-up output tray

Holds approximately 100 sheets of paper delivered face up and uncollated.

3. Left ventilation openings

Enables airflow. Keep these ventilation openings free of obstruction and debris.

4. Power receptacle

Used to attach printer power cable to power source.

5. Input/output connectors

Used to attach data cables between the options controller card and selected

options such as the 2000-sheet input drawer and 2000-sheet finisher.

6. Power receptacle

Used to attach the 2000-sheet input drawer power cable to a power source.

7. Controller card slot

Opening where the controller card and options controller card are mounted inside

the printer.

8. Rear ventilation openings

Enables airflow. Keep these ventilation openings free of obstruction and debris.

10 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Parts and Locations—Optional 2000-Sheet Finisher

Figure 6. Key Printer Parts and Locations-Optional 2000-Sheet Finisher

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Upper paper access cover (top cover)

Open to remove paper jams.

2. Lower paper access cover (input cover)

Open to remove paper jams.

3. Stapler cover

Open to access stapler for loading staples or removing jammed staples.

4. Lower output bin

Used to stack paper.

5. Middle output bin

Used to stack paper.

6. Upper output bin

Used to stack paper.

12 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Features

Optional features that you can order (or may have been ordered and installed on your

printer at the time of purchase) include:

Duplex Unit

Enables printing on both sides of paper. This is often called two-sided printing or duplex

printing. If you order this feature, you may want to consider ordering additional memory

as the printer requires at least 8 MB of DRAM memory to support duplex printing.

Upper 500 Sheet Paper Tray (Tray 1)

Provides replacement for the original paper tray. Tray 1 does not support paper sizes

A3 and ledger.

Lower 500 Sheet Paper Tray (Tray 2)

Provides replacement for the original paper tray. Tray 2 supports paper sizes A3, A4,

B4, Letter, Legal, and Ledger.

2000-Sheet Paper Input Drawer (Tray 3)

Provides up to 2000 sheets of paper in A3, A4, B4, Letter, Legal, or Ledger sizes. The

2000-sheet paper input drawer (Tray 3) is sturdy and sits upon four rollers thus

enabling you to place the printer on top of this feature as shown in Figure 2 on page 4.

If you order this feature, you do not need to order the optional printer stand.

This feature requires that the options controller card feature be installed in the printer.

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2000-Sheet Finisher

Supports stacking and stapling of print jobs. The 2000-sheet finisher attaches to the

side of the printer and sits upon rollers. The 2000-sheet finisher is attached to the

printer in place of the face-up tray and requires that the 2000-sheet input drawer be

installed. This feature has three paper bins that store printed jobs.

Table 1. 2000-Sheet Finisher Capacity-Standard Paper Sizes

Paper Size

Output Bin

Upper

Total Sheets

600 sheets

700 sheets

A4, A5, B5, letter or executive

Middle

Lower

Table 2. 2000-Sheet Finisher Capacity-Large Paper Sizes

Paper Size

Output Bin

Upper

Total Sheets

300 sheets

350 sheets

A3, B4, legal or ledger

Middle

A3, B4, legal or ledger

Lower

Included with the 2000-sheet finisher is a stapler. The stapler provides a 2,000 staple

cartridge. The stapler supports three stapling styles: oblique, parallel 1 place, and

parallel 2 places. (For information on using the stapler function, review the information

provided with the printer driver. You select stapling options from the printer driver, not

from the printer operator panel.)

When the stapling feature is used, bin 1 can hold 300 sheets, bins 2 and 3 each can

hold 350 sheets. The stapling feature can staple 20 sheets together in one set. Each

bin can hold up to 30 sets of stapled paper if the total number of sheets is less than

300. (Or a maximum of 15 sets with 20 sheets stapled together per set.)

This feature requires the options controller card and 2000-sheet input drawer features

are installed in the printer.

Options Controller Card

Supports use of the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3) and the 2000 sheet finisher. The

card plugs into the printer controller card to provide use of selected options.

If you plan to use either the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3) or 2000-sheet finisher,

you must also order this feature.

US 9 Foot Line Cord

Enables you to supply power to the printer when the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3)

or 2000 sheet finisher is installed. :

14 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

US 6 Foot Chicago Line Cord

Meets City of Chicago, Illinois specifications.

Printer Stand

Enables you to place the printer on top for easy access. The printer stand is mounted

on four wheels and provides a sturdy stand. The printer stand has doors that open for

paper and supplies storage. If you order the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3), you do

not need to order the printer stand as the printer sits atop the 2000-sheet input drawer

(Tray 3).

Envelope Feeder

Enables envelopes to be fed directly to the printer for printing. Useful for printing large

numbers of envelopes. The envelope feeder supports COM 10, B5, C5, DL, and

Monarch size envelopes. You can stack up to 100 envelopes in the feeder.

Printer Memory

Supports processing of print jobs. There are two kinds of memory available with this

printer: DRAM and Flash.

DRAM Memory

DRAM memory is used to store fonts that are downloaded from the operating system

(this enables fonts to be used that are not resident on the printer).

Additional DRAM memory is required to support optional features, such as duplex

printing. (See Chapter 8, “Managing Printer Memory” on page 197. to determine how

much memory is needed for optional features.)

DRAM memory can be increased to a maximum of 68 MB (4MB installed and two

32MB DRAM SIMMs). DRAM memory is available in 4 MB, 8 MB, 16 MB, and 32 MB

SIMMs. There are two slots provided on the printer controller. To install the maximum

amount of memory, you would install two 32 MB SIMMs. For a detailed discussion on

memory management and to determine how much memory is needed to support data

streams and optional features, see Chapter 8, “Managing Printer Memory” on

page 197.

Flash Memory

Flash Memory is used to store fonts that are downloaded from the operating system

(this enables fonts to be used that are not resident on the printer). Flash memory

enables fonts to be available permanently until you remove the fonts from flash

memory. This is useful if you use a custom designed font or a unique font that is used

in many print jobs. Storing the font on flash memory improves print performance. There

is one slot provided for flash memory. You can order either a 2 MB or 4 MB Flash

SIMM. For a detailed discussion on memory management, see Chapter 8, “Managing

Printer Memory” on page 197.

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hard Drive

Supports processing of print jobs and storage of fonts. Fonts can be stored on the hard

drive which enables the printer to print fonts that are not resident on the printer. The

hard drive is a 2.5 inch drive with 810 MB of storage. You can install only one hard

drive on the printer controller. For a detailed discussion on memory management, see

Chapter 8, “Managing Printer Memory” on page 197.

Adobe PostScript

Provides Adobe PostScript Level 2 support and when installed, supplies 65 PostScript

Adobe Type 1 resident printer fonts. The Adobe PostScript feature is contained on one

SIMM and plugs into the printer controller. The 65 Adobe Type 1 fonts are described in

“PostScript Fonts” on page 21.

Note: If you purchased the IBM Network Printer 24PS, you will not need to order this

feature. Also, the IBM Network Printer 24PS comes with 12 MB of RAM standard to

support PostScript printing.

IPDS

Provides Intelligent Presentation Data Stream (IPDS) support on one SIMM. With IPDS

installed, you can print jobs from applications that use IPDS thus providing compatibility

with many host based printers.

Network Card for Ethernet (10Base2 or 10BaseT)

Enables you to attach this printer to Ethernet based LANs. (A separate manual is

shipped with this feature that describes supported functions.)

Network Card for Token Ring

Enables you to attach this printer to Token Ring based LANs. (A separate manual is

shipped with this feature that describes supported functions.)

Twinax SCS Interface Card

Enables you to attach this printer to host and workstations that use Twinax

communications. (A separate manual is shipped with this feature that describes

supported functions.)

Coax SCS/DSC/DSE Interface

Enables you to attach this printer to host and workstations that use Coax

communications. (A separate manual is shipped with this feature that describes

supported functions.)

16 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ordering Optional Features

To order optional features, contact your IBM Authorized Dealer or IBM Sales

Representative.

Table 3 (Page 1 of 2). Optional Feature Descriptions and Order Numbers

Feature

Description

Feature

Number

Part Number

Duplex Unit

Enables printing on both sides of

paper, which is called duplex.

This feature requires at least 8

MB of DRAM memory to support

duplex printing.

4402

63H4470

Upper 500 Sheet Paper Tray (Tray

Provides replacement for original

paper tray. Tray 1 does not

support paper sizes A3 and

Ledger.

4503

4504

4520

63H4478

63H4480

63H4472

Lower 500 Sheet Paper Tray (Tray

Provides replacement for original

paper tray. Tray 2 supports paper

sizes A3, A4, B4, Letter, Legal,

and Ledger.

2000-Sheet Paper Input Drawer

(Tray 3)

Provides up to 2000 sheets of

paper in A3, A4, B4, Letter, and

Legal. This feature requires the

options controller card feature

be installed.

2000-Sheet Finisher

Provides ability to staple print jobs

together and stack output. This

feature requires the options

controller card and 2000-sheet

input drawer features are

installed.

4620

63H5662

Options Controller Card

Envelope Feeder

Supports use of 2000-Sheet Input

Drawer (Tray 3) and 2000-Sheet

Finisher.

4230

4511

63H4484

63H4476

Enables envelopes to be fed

directly to the printer for printing.

The envelope feeder supports

COM 10, B5, C5, DL, and

Monarch size envelopes. You can

stack up to 100 envelopes in the

feeder.

4MB DRAM SIMM

8MB DRAM SIMM

16MB DRAM SIMM

32MB DRAM SIMM

2MB Flash SIMM

Supports processing of print jobs.

4304

4308

4316

4332

4030

63H2463

63H2465

63H2467

63H2469

63H2443

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3 (Page 2 of 2). Optional Feature Descriptions and Order Numbers

Feature

Description

Feature

Number

Part Number

4MB Flash SIMM

Hard Drive 810 MB

Printer Stand

Supports processing of print jobs.

4032

4320

3050

63H2444

63H2490

63H4482

Enables printer to be placed on

top and provides for paper

storage. Do not order if you

installed the 2000-sheet input

drawer option.

Adobe PostScript Level 2 SIMM

Provides Adobe PostScript Level 2

support and when installed,

supplies 65 PostScript Adobe

Type 1 resident printer fonts.

4810

63H5651

Do not order this feature if you

purchased the IBM Network

Printer 24PS.

IPDS SIMM

Provides Intelligent Presentation

Data Stream (IPDS).

4820

4161

4120

4141

63H4490

63H2142

63H2141

63H2445

Network Card for Ethernet

(10Base2 or 10BaseT)

Enables you to attach this printer

to Ethernet based LANs.

Network Card for Token Ring

Enables you to attach this printer

to Token Ring based LANs.

Twinax SCS Interface Card

Enables you to attach this printer

to host and workstations that use

Twinax communications.

Coax SCS/DSC/DSE Interface

Card

Enables you to attach this printer

to host and workstations that use

Coax communications.

4171

N/A

63H2447

6952300

US 9 Foot Line Cord

Attaches to printer when either

2000-Sheet Input Drawer (Tray 3)

or 2000-Sheet Finisher is installed.

US 6 Foot Chicago Line Cord

Parallel Printer Cable

Meets City of Chicago, Illinois

specifications.

N/A

6952301

63H1994

Parallel printer cable that meets

IEEE Standard 1284-1994 and

provides bidirectional

communication between host and

printer. Cable is 3 meters

(approximately 10 feet) in length.

18 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ordering Supplies

To order supplies, contact your IBM Authorized Dealer or IBM Printing Systems

Company Supplies. In the United States or Canada, you can contact IBM Printing

Systems Company Supplies by calling toll-free 1-888-IBM-PRINT (1-888-426-7746).

In other countries, contact your point of purchase for information about where to order

supplies or you can call IBM Supplies Fulfillment Operations at the following numbers:

Denmark: 800 15534

Finland: 08001 13110

France: 0590 5871

Germany: 0130 818 005

Italy: 1678 78349

Netherlands 043 350 2756

Spain 900 983131

Sweden: 0207 94270

United Kingdom: 08009 68679

You can also call IBM Supplies Fulfillment Operations at 31-43-350 2756.

Table 4. Supplies Descriptions and Part Numbers

Supply

Description

Part Number

63H5721

63H5718

63H5719

63H5720

Toner Cartridge

15,000 impressions (See note 1)

350,000 impressions (See note 2)

Usage kit (Low Voltage)

Usage kit (High Voltage)

Staple Cartridges

3 cartridges with 2,000 staples in each

cartridge. Used with the 2000-sheet

finisher's staple function.

Note:

1. For toner cartridge, the approximate average yield was established with a coverage of 5 percent. An

impression is defined as one side of a printed letter size page. (A duplex page or print on both sides of the

paper is defined as two impressions.) The TonerMiser (ECONO Mode) feature can provide double the page

yield, depending upon the type of printing.

2. The usage kit includes a fuser assembly, pick-up rollers, feed rollers, separation rollers, and transfer charging

roller assembly. The 350,000 impressions (pages) is a guideline; see Appendix D, “Installing the Usage Kit”

on page 241 for more information on when you need to install a usage kit.

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Describing Resident Fonts

Resident fonts, also called internal fonts, are fonts that are stored on the printer. By

storing these fonts on the printer, the fonts do not need to be downloaded from the

operating system which helps improve print time. There are two types of fonts available:

PCL and Adobe PostScript. The PCL fonts are standard, while the Adobe PostScript

fonts are only available if the Adobe PostScript feature is installed or your purchased

the IBM Network Printer 24PS model.

Network Administrator Tip

By using resident fonts, printing time may be improved because the fonts do not

need to be downloaded from the operating system. In a network environment,

reducing the number of fonts that are downloaded per print job could increase print

performance. You may want to encourage your users to select and use from their

applications those fonts that are resident on the printer.

PCL Fonts

The following PCL fonts are resident on the printer. If you are not familiar with these

fonts, you can print a listing of these fonts directly from the printer. See “Printing a List

of PCL5e Fonts” on page 39 for information on printing a font list.

35 PCL Outline Fonts - commonly called Intellifonts:

–

Albertus Medium, Albertus Extra Bold

Antique Olive, Antique Olive Bold, Antique Olive Italic

CG Omega, CG Omega Bold, CG Omega Italic, CG Omega Italic Bold

CG Times, CG Times Bold, CG Times Italic, CG Times Bold Italic

Clarendon Condensed

Coronet

Courier, Courier Bold, Courier Italic, Courier Bold Italic

Garmond Antiqua

Garmond Halfbett

Garmond Kursiv

Garmond Kursiv Halfbett

Letter Gothic, Letter Gothic Bold, Letter Gothic Italic

Marigold

Univers Medium, Univers Bold, Univers Medium Condensed, Univers Medium

Condensed Italic, Univers Bold Condensed Italic

10 True Type Fonts

–

Arial, Arial Bold, Arial Italic, Arial Bold Italic

Symbol

Times New Roman, Times New Roman Bold, Times New Roman Italic, Times

New Roman Bold Italic

Wingdings

–

2 Bit Mapped Fonts

–

LinePrinter 16.7 pitch, 8.5 Point (portrait)

20 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

LinePrinter 16.7 pitch, 8.5 point (landscape)

PostScript Fonts

The optional Adobe PostScript feature or the IBM Network Printer 24PS provides 65

PostScript Adobe Type 1 resident fonts. If you are not familiar with these fonts, you can

print a listing of these fonts directly from the printer. See “Printing a List of PostScript

Fonts” on page 39 for information on printing a font list.

Acaslon Regular, Acaslon Italic, ACaslon Semibold, and ACaslon Semibold Italic

AGaramond Regular, AGaramond Bold, AGaramond Bold Italic, and AGaramond

Italic

Americana and Americana Extra Bold

Barmemo Bold, Barmemo Extra Bold, Barmemo Medium, and Barmemo Regular

Blackoak

Carta

Courier, Courier Bold, Courier Oblique, Courier Bold Oblique

Formata Italic, Formata Medium, Formata Medium Italic, and Formata Regular

Helvetica, Helvetica Bold, Helvetica Oblique, Helvetica Bold Oblique, Helvetica

Condensed, Helvetica Condensed Oblique, Helvetica Narrow, Helvetica Narrow

Bold, Helvetica Narrow Oblique, Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique

ITC Avant Garde Book, ITC Avant Garde Demi, ITC Advant Garde Book Oblique,

ITC Advant Garde Demi Oblique

ITC Bookman Light, ITC Bookman Demi, ITC Bookman Light Italic, ITC Bookman

Demi Italic

ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic

ITC Zapf Dingbats

Lithos Black and Lithos Regular

New Century Schoolbook Roman, New Century Schoolbook Bold, New Century

Schoolbook Italic, New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic

Palatino Roman, Palatino Bold, Palatino Italic, Palatino Bold Italic

Parisian

ParkAvenue

Poetica Supp Ornaments

Symbol

Tekton and Tekton Bold

Times Roman

Times Bold, Times Italic, and Times Bold Italic

Trajan Bold

Woodtype Ornaments Two

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Printer Drivers

Printer drivers are shipped with this printer to enable users to select many printer

functions without needing to make changes at the printer operator panel. Selections

made by users from the printer drivers always override selections made at the operator

panel.

Network Administrator Tip

Make sure you are familiar with the printer drivers you use on your network. Most

users will not change or select functions from the printer operator panel, but instead

will select functions from the printer driver. It is also important to check the IBM

Home Page and Printing Systems Company Home Page for updated drivers which

may improve print performance.

Most of these printer drivers are shipped with an installation program that assists you in

installing the printer driver on your operating system. Installation information is included

with the printer driver.

The printer may include diskettes which contain printer drivers for the following

systems:

AIX 3.2.5 and AIX 4.1 (colon files)

Macintosh 7.0

OS/2 2.11 and OS/2 Warp

Windows 3.1, Windows 3.11, Windows for Workgroups 3.11, Win-OS/2 for OS/2

2.11, and Windows with OS/2 Warp

Windows 95

Windows NT 3.51

Notes:

1. PostScript drivers are shipped with the optional PostScript feature or with the

printer if you purchased the IBM Network Printer 24PS.

2. For information on attaching this printer using specific attachments, such as Coax,

review the documentation shipped with the attachment feature.

22 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Obtaining Printer Drivers

Some printer drivers may be made available through the World Wide Web as described

below. These printer drivers may not have been available at the time this printer was

shipped or may have been updated since the printer was shipped.

To obtain printer drivers, follow these steps:

1. Access the IBM Home Page at http://www.ibm.com or the IBM Printing Systems

Company Home Page at http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

2. At the IBM Home Page, use the Search tool and search for Network Printer 24 or

24PS. This will lead you to useful information about the printer and printer driver

support.

3. At the IBM Printing Systems Company Home Page, select Printer Drivers/Product

Updates.

4. Use the menu selections to find freeware, printer drivers, software fixes, or

documentation that you want to obtain.

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Network Printer Manager Utility

Network Printer Manager (NPM) Utility is an easy to use graphical interface in US

English for network administrators that can alert you to events, such as a paper jam,

out of toner condition, and other information such as number of pages printed.

The initial versions of NPM that are available support these operating systems:

IBM OS/2

Microsoft Windows 95

Microsoft Windows NT (3.51 and 4.0)

NPM enables you to install and configure IBM Network Printers in Local Area Networks

(LANs), including Novell 3.12 and 4.x networks in bindery emulation (printer network

cards can be NDS-configured with NWAdmin). NPM also monitors and provides

network printer status using industry standard, open systems System Network

Management Protocol (SNMP). SNMP supports Management Information Base (MIB)

which is a collection of information that describes the printer's functions and features.

NPM using SNMP can provide status information about the printer such as on or offline,

paper jam, out of toner, and input tray empty. NPM also provides information about

printer properties, such as printer type, pages printed, paper tray, type of paper used,

output bins, network address, options installed, and number of pages printed.

Network Administrator Tip

The Network Printer Manager utility alerts you to events, such as a paper jam or

out of toner, at your workstation. The utility provides a graphical user interface that

enables you to check status of a printer. For instance, a screen is provided that

shows the printer name and the printer status, such as normal, pages printed, and

so on.

If the printer were out of toner, the status would indicate out of toner. An alarm log

is provided so you can view messages such as paper jam.

This utility is a useful tool to help you manage this printer in a network environment.

Other versions will be made available on the WWW through the IBM Printing Systems

Company home page. Follow the instructions below for obtaining updated versions.

Obtaining Network Printer Manager Utility

To obtain Network Printer Manager Utility, follow these steps:

1. Access the IBM Home Page at http://www.ibm.com or the IBM Printing Systems

Company Home Page at http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

2. At the IBM Home Page, use the Search tool and search for Network Printer 24 or

24PS. This will lead you to useful information about the printer and Network Printer

Manager.

24 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. At the IBM Printing Systems Company Home Page, select Printer Drivers/Product

Updates.

4. Use the menu selections to find freeware, printer drivers, software fixes, or

documentation that you want to obtain.

Using Network Printer Resource Utility

Network Printer Resource Utility (NPRU) is a utility that enables administrators to

download fonts and PCL macros (overlays) to the printer. Using NPRU, the network

administrator can identify PCL Intellifonts, TrueType fonts, overlays, or PostScript Type

1 fonts on a workstation and download them to temporary or permanent DRAM on the

printer or to Flash memory or a hard drive, if these options are available on the printer.

The network administrator can provide a network address for the NPRU data base of

downloaded resources to workstation users. Those users can then use the printer

driver to connect to the data base, enabling them to select downloaded fonts and

overlays from within their applications.

The NPRU is a separate program that uses the printer driver programs to perform the

download function. For more information about using NPRU, refer to the README file

that is supplied with the utility.

Obtaining Network Printer Resource Utility

NPRU is shipped with the OS/2 printer drivers. To obtain other versions or updates,

follow these steps:

1. Access the IBM Home Page at http://www.ibm.com or the IBM Printing Systems

Company Home Page at http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

2. At the IBM Home Page, use the Search tool and search for Network Printer 24 or

24PS. This will lead you to useful information about the printer and Network Printer

Manager.

3. At the IBM Printing Systems Home Page, select Printer Drivers/Product Updates.

4. Use the menu selections to find freeware, printer drivers, software fixes, or

documentation that you want to obtain.

Using Print Services Facility Software with IPDS

The combination of Print Services Facility software and the Intelligent Presentation Data

Stream (IPDS) provides access to host applications and enhanced error recovery. With

the IPDS feature installed, print jobs using IPDS do not need to be converted into other

data streams, such as PCL.

The following Print Services Facility (PSF) software applications provide print support

for this printer:

PSF/MVS V2.1.0, V2.1.1, and V2.2.0

PSF/VSE V2.1.1

PSF/VM V2.1.1

Chapter 1. About Your Printer 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PSF/400 V3.1, V3.2, and V3.6

OS/400 AFP=Yes, V2.2, V2.3, and V3.0.5

–

PSF for AIX V2.1

PSF/2 V2.0

For detailed information, review the appropriate PSF documentation or access

information at http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

Obtaining Adobe Acrobat Portable Data Files

This manual is available in Adobe Acrobat Portable Data File (PDF) format for online

viewing and printing. To obtain this manual in PDF format:

1. Access the IBM Home Page at http://www.ibm.com or the IBM Printing Systems

Company Home Page at http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

2. At the IBM Home Page, use the Search tool and search for Network Printer 24 or

24PS.

3. At the IBM Printing Systems Home Page, select Printer Drivers/Product Updates.

4. Use the menu selections to find freeware, printer drivers, software fixes, or

documentation that you want to obtain.

26 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel

This chapter describes how to use the Network Printer 24 and 24PS operator panel.

The operator panel location is shown below:

The operator panel consists of a message display area, status indicator lights, and

operator keys.

Figure 7. IBM Network Printer 24 Operator Panel

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Printer 24PS

Power

Attention

Enter

Cancel Print

Page Eject

Value

Online

Continue

Item

Shift

Figure 8. IBM Network Printer 24PS Operator Panel

For information about indicator lights, see “Understanding the Operator Panel

Indicator Lights” on page 29.

For information about the most common messages you will see in the message

display area, see “Understanding Common Messages” on page 42. For a

complete listing, see Appendix B, “Understanding Printer Messages” on page 215.

For information about operator panel keys, see “Using the Operator Panel Keys” on

page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two Examples” on page 31.

For an overview of some of the most common operator panel tasks, see

“Performing Other Common Operator Panel Tasks” on page 38.

For a complete overview of all printer menus, see Chapter 3, “Navigating Through

the Operator Panel Menus” on page 43.

28 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Understanding the Operator Panel Indicator Lights

The indicator lights, which can be on, off, or blinking, are shown in Figure 9.

Figure 9. Operator Panel Indicator Lights

Indicator

Condition

Power

On—the printer is on.

Off—printer is turned off or unplugged from the power outlet.

Online

On—the printer is online and idle. (Printer must be online to print

jobs.)

Blinking—the printer is online and receiving or processing data.

Off—the printer is offline. The printer must be offline before you can

change the menu settings.

Continue

On—a condition that requires operator attention exists. Press the

Continue key to resume printing or press the Cancel Print. key to

cancel printing. (If the Auto-Continue function is on, the printer may

automatically resume printing after thirty seconds. For more

information, see the description of the AUTOCONT item under

“Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51.)

Off—the printer is operating normally.

Page Eject

On—a page or partial page is stored in memory. If you are printing a

PCL5e job, you can press the Page Eject key to print the page. The

Page Eject key has no effect on PostScript or IPDS jobs.

Blinking—the printer is printing the PCL5e page you pressed the

Page Eject key to print. If you are running a continuous test

(CONTINUOUS TEST from the Test Menu) and you press the

Cancel Print key, the Page Eject indicator blinks to inform you that

the printer is canceling the test.

Off—no pages are stored in the printer memory.

Blinking—the printer requires operator attention.

Off—the printer is operating normally.

Attention

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Operator Panel Keys

The operator panel keys enable you to configure and operate the printer. They are

located at the bottom of the operator panel.

Use the Online key to take the printer offline or to put it back online.

Note: The printer must be offline before you can change menu settings.

Use the Continue key to continue printing when the Continue light is lit.

Use the Page Eject key to print a PCL5e job that is stored in the memory

buffer of the printer. (The Page Eject indicator light is on when a page is

in the buffer.) The printer prints the page even if it is not complete in the

memory buffer. The Page Eject key does not apply to PostScript or IPDS

jobs.

The printer must be offline to use this key.

Use the Cancel Print key to cancel the current print job. The printer

finishes printing the current page before it cancels the rest of the job.

After the job is canceled, the printer begins printing the next job in the

queue.

The printer must be offline to use this key.

Use the Enter key to change a menu item to a new value when the value

is displayed in the message display area. After you press Enter, an

asterisk (*) appears next to the value indicating that the value is active.

Use the Menu key to scroll through the menu list. As you scroll through

the list, the current menu is displayed in the message display area.

Note: Before you can navigate menus, the printer must be offline.

Use the Item key to scroll through the list of items for the menu listed in

the message display area. As you scroll through the list, the current item

and, if applicable, the current value for the item is displayed in the

message display area, just below the name of the current menu. An

asterisk (*) appears next to the current value.

Use the Value key to scroll through a list of acceptable values for a menu

item.

Note: To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is

displayed in the message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to

the value, indicating that it is now active.

Use the Shift key, by pressing and holding the key, to reverse the order in

which you scroll when you use the Menu, Item, or Value keys.

30 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigating Menus — Two Examples

There are two types of menus: action menus and configuration menus.

Action Menus

Action menus contain a list of items you can select to perform specific actions, such as

printing a list of active fonts or printing a printer configuration page. There are two

action menus: the Test Menu and the Machine Info Menu.

To work with action menus:

1. Make sure the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press the Online key to

take it offline.

2. Press the Menu key to display the menu you want.

3. Press the Item key to display the action item you want.

4. Press the Enter key to perform the action you selected.

For an example of working with an action menu, see “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32.

Configuration Menus

Configuration menus contain lists of items that define current settings for the printer,

such as default fonts, default input trays and output bins, and attachment configuration

settings.

To work with configuration menus:

1. Make sure the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press the Online key to

take it offline.

2. Press the Menu key to display the menu you want.

3. Press the Item key to display the item you want.

4. Press the Value key to display the value you want.

5. Press the Enter key to change the setting to the value currently displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value after it is selected.

Note: Once you select a new value, it stays selected until you change it or you reset

the printer defaults. Menu settings are saved when you power off the printer.

For an example of working with a configuration menu, see “Example 2 — Reducing

Toner Usage” on page 36.

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page

1. Before printing a configuration page, make sure all print jobs are finished. If you

need to immediately print a configuration page, then cancel the job that is currently

printing. See “Canceling a Print Job” on page 38.

2. Make sure the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press the Online key to

take it offline.

3. Press the Menu key once. TEST MENU appears in the message display area.

4. Press the Item key once. CONFIG PAGE appears in the message display area.

Note that the menu name appears on the top line and the action item appears on

the second line.

32 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Press the Enter key to print the configuration page. (If you do not have letter or A4

paper loaded, the message Load Letter may be displayed; press the Continue key

to print the configuration page.) Printing the configuration page takes a moment or

two.

Important

The following figure shows a sample printer configuration page. Your actual

configuration page will contain different information based on installed options

and date of manufacture.

IBM Network Printer 24

Configuration Page

TEST MENU

CONFIG PAGE

MEMCONFIG MENU

PCL SAVE = OFF

PS2 SAVE = OFF

MACHINE INFO

PAGE COUNT

ERROR LOG

TONER CTR

PRINT PS FONTS

PRINT PCL FONTS

PRINT PS DEMO

CONTINUOUS TEST

RESET PRINTER

FACTORY DEFAULT

FORMAT DISK

FUSER CTR

PARALLEL MENU

PERSONALTY = AUTO

BI-DI = ON

LANGUAGE MENU

LANG = ENGLISH

PORT TIMEOUT = 15

ONLINE HEX PRT

PCL MENU

PAGEPROT = AUTO

COPIES = 1

PAGESIZE = LETTER

ORIENTAION = P

FORM = 60 LINES

FNTSCR = INTERNAL

FONTNUM = 0

PT.SIZE = 12.00

PITCH = 10.00

INSTALLED OPTIONS

DUPLEX

ENVELOPE FEEDER

ETHERNET

DISK

PAPER MENU

SOURCE = TRAY 2

OUTPUT = MAIN

TRAY SWITCH = OFF

MANUAL = OFF

AUXSIZE = LETTER

ENVSIZE = COM10

DUPLEX = ON

32 MB Extra Memory

TOTAL MEMORY = 36 MB

BINDING = LONG

TRAY RENUM = OFF

SYMSET = ROMAN-8

AUTOSENSED PAPER

TRAY 1= LETTER

TRAY 2 = 11 X 17

CONFIG MENU

PS MENU

PAGEPROT = AUTO

COPIES = 1

JAMRECOVERY = OFF

AUTOCONTINU = ON

DENSITY = 15

PWRSAV=30 MIN

QUALITY = REFINE

PRINT ERRS = OFF

PRINTER DETAILS

PAGE COUNT = 3330

TONER CTR = 1741

FUSER CTR =1741

CODE LEVELS

CTL 1.04

ETHERNET MENU

PERSONALTY = AUTO

PORT TMEOUT = 15

PCL 1.3.1

PS 1.06

EN 5.16

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online

Network Administrator Tip

The configuration page lists all menus and menus items in the same order as

displayed on the printer operator panel. You can use the configuration page as a

map for the menus. You may want to display a configuration page near the printer

to assist users in selecting menus and menu items.

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reading the Printer Configuration Page

The printer configuration page, as shown in Figure 10 on page 35, lists the following

information:

1. Menus—All of the menu settings currently active for your printer. Note that the list

of menus you see is determined by the options you have installed; for example,

you see the Ethernet Menu only when you have the Ethernet attachment installed.

For a description of all available menus, see Chapter 3, “Navigating Through the

Operator Panel Menus” on page 43.

2. Installed Options—The options and memory you have installed. In this example,

optional Envelope Feeder and Duplex unit are installed.

Important: IBM recommends printing the Printer Configuration Page whenever you

install a new option. Review Installed Options to make sure the printer recognizes

the option you installed. If the option is not listed, reinstall the option again.

3. Autosensed Paper—The paper loaded in various trays. In this example, letter

size paper is loaded in Tray 1 and 11 by 17 inch paper is loaded in Tray 2.

4. Printer Details—Page counts for the printer, the toner cartridge, the fuser, and

printer program code levels.

a. Page Count—The number of pages printed on the printer.

b. Toner CTR—The number of pages printed with the toner cartridge. (You

should reset the toner count whenever you replace the toner cartridge.) See

“Machine Information Menu” on page 80 for more information.

c. Fuser CTR—The number of pages printed with the fuser. (You should reset

the fuser counter whenever you replace the fuser.) See “Machine Information

Menu” on page 80 for more information.

d. Code Levels—The printer program code version levels installed on the printer

for the printer controller, data stream languages, and option code. If you need

to update the printer's “operating system,” also called controller code, or add

an option, you may need to update the following software with different

versions:

e. CTL—The printer controller program code version. (If you need to update the

printer's “operating system,” also called controller code, you will need this

number.)

f. PCL—The PCL data stream version.

g. PS—The PostScript data stream version.

h. EN—The Ethernet version.

Note: If you have other options installed or network interface cards, the list of Code

Levels will be different from the following example.

34 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IBM Network Printer 24

Configuration Page

TEST MENU

CONFIG PAGE

MEMCONFIG MENU

PCL SAVE = OFF

PS2 SAVE = OFF

MACHINE INFO

PAGE COUNT

ERROR LOG

TONER CTR

PRINT PS FONTS

PRINT PCL FONTS

PRINT PS DEMO

CONTINUOUS TEST

RESET PRINTER

FACTORY DEFAULT

FORMAT DISK

FUSER CTR

PARALLEL MENU

PERSONALTY = AUTO

BI-DI = ON

LANGUAGE MENU

LANG = ENGLISH

PORT TIMEOUT = 15

ONLINE HEX PRT

PCL MENU

PAGEPROT = AUTO

COPIES = 1

PAGESIZE = LETTER

ORIENTAION = P

FORM = 60 LINES

FNTSCR = INTERNAL

FONTNUM = 0

PT.SIZE = 12.00

PITCH = 10.00

SYMSET = ROMAN-8

PAPER MENU

INSTALLED OPTIONS

DUPLEX

ENVELOPE FEEDER

ETHERNET

DISK

SOURCE = TRAY 2

OUTPUT = MAIN

TRAY SWITCH = OFF

MANUAL = OFF

AUXSIZE = LETTER

ENVSIZE = COM10

DUPLEX = ON

32 MB Extra Memory

BINDING = LONG

TRAY RENUM = OFF

TOTAL MEMORY = 36 MB

CONFIG MENU

PS MENU

PAGEPROT = AUTO

COPIES = 1

JAMRECOVERY = OFF

AUTOCONTINU = ON

DENSITY = 15

AUTOSENSED PAPER

TRAY 1= LETTER

PRINT ERRS = OFF

TRAY 2 = 11 X 17

PWRSAV=30 MIN

QUALITY = REFINE

ETHERNET MENU

PERSONALTY = AUTO

PORT TMEOUT = 15

PRINTER DETAILS

PAGE COUNT = 3330

TONER CTR = 1741

FUSER CTR =1741

CODE LEVELS

CTL 1.04

PCL 1.3.1

PS 1.06

EN 5.16

PRINTER DETAILS

PAGE COUNT = 3330

TONER CTR = 1741

FUSER CTR =1741

CODE LEVELS

CTL 1.04

PCL 1.3.1

PS 1.06

EN 5.16

c9pu241

Figure 10. IBM Network Printer 24/24PS Configuration page

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2 — Reducing Toner Usage

The following example shows how to use less toner if you print jobs that do not require

high-quality resolution.

1. Make sure the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press the Online key to

take it offline.

2. Press the Menu key until you see CONFIG MENU.

3. Press the Item key until you see QUALITY=REFINE*. (REFINE is the factory

default; if it has already been changed, you will see the new value instead of

REFINE.)

36 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Press the Value key until you see QUALITY=ECONO.

5. Press the Enter key. An asterisk appears next to ECONO, indicating that it is now

the active value.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performing Other Common Operator Panel Tasks

Below are some common tasks performed at the operator panel. Most other tasks

performed at the operator panel are similar to these tasks. Once you become familiar

with any of these tasks, you should be able to complete other tasks at the operator

panel.

Canceling a Print Job

Situation: You want to cancel the job that is currently printing.

Action:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Cancel Print key. The current job will be canceled and removed from

the queue after the printer completes the current page.

3. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Selecting Binding for Duplex Print Jobs

Situation: You want to select how to print pages in duplex mode and the optional

duplex feature is installed in the printer. The binding item has two values: long or short.

Long prints the paper so that the document can be bound along the long edge, while

short prints the paper so the document can be bound on the short edge. Long is the

most common binding for documents while short is more common for calendars and

presentations.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see BINDING=LONG* in the display. (If this value

has already been changed, a value other than LONG will be displayed.)

4. Press the Value key until you see SHORT.

5. Press the Enter key to select the binding value. An asterisk (*) appears next to

the value, showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

38 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing a Stored Page (PCL5e Jobs Only)

Situation: The Page Eject indicator is lit, indicating that the printer has stored data that

needs to be printed, but has not received a command to print the page.

Action:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Page Eject key. The page prints.

3. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Note: The Page Eject key is valid only for PCL5e jobs; it does not print pages of

PostScript or IPDS jobs.

Printing a List of PCL5e Fonts

Situation: You want to see a list of the PCL5e fonts installed on the printer.

Action:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Menu key. TEST MENU appears in the display area.

3. Press the Item key until you see PRINT PCL FONTS.

4. Press the Enter key to print the PCL5e fonts list.

5. After the page prints, press the Online key to restore the printer to READY status.

Printing a List of PostScript Fonts

Situation: You have the optional PostScript Level 2 SIMM installed on your printer and

you want to see a list of the PostScript fonts.

Action:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Menu key. TEST MENU appears in the display area.

3. Press the Item key until you see PRINT PS FONTS. (This item appears only if

you have the optional PostScript Level 2 SIMM installed on your printer.)

4. Press the Enter key to print the PostScript fonts list.

5. After the page prints, press the Online key to restore the printer to READY status.

Printing a List of IPDS Fonts

Situation: You have the optional IPDS SIMM installed on your printer and you want to

see a list of the IPDS fonts.

Action:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Menu key. TEST MENU appears in the display area.

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Press the Item key until you see PRINT IPDS FONTS. (This item appears only if

you have the optional IPDS SIMM installed on your printer.)

4. Press the Enter key to print the PostScript fonts list.

5. After the page prints, press the Online key to restore the printer to READY status.

Adjusting Print Density (Printing Darker or Lighter)

Situation: You want to increase or decrease the print density, making the print darker

or lighter.

Note: Adjusting the density affects toner usage. By setting a higher density value, you

may use more toner.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see CONFIG MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see DENSITY=n* in the display, where n is the

density value currently selected. (6 is the factory default.)

4. Press the Value key until you see the value you want to assign to the toner

density; 15 is the darkest print, 0 is the lightest.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new density. An asterisk (*) appears next to the

value, showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Changing the Power-Savings (Sleep Mode) Interval

Situation: You want to change the power-savings mode to increase or decrease the

interval. When you first install your printer, the printer is set up to go into

power-savings mode (or sleep mode) after it is inactive for 30 minutes. In this mode,

the printer powers down most of its systems and therefore requires extra time to warm

up when the next print is requested.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see CONFIG MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see PWRSAV=30* in the display. (If this value has

already been changed, a number other than 30 will appear in the display.)

4. Press the Value key until you see the value (number of minutes) you want to

assign to the power-saver feature.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new power-savings value. An asterisk (*)

appears next to the value, showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

40 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the Language Shown on the Display Panel

Situation: You want to display operator panel messages and menus in a language

other than English.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Shift and Menu keys simultaneously. you see LANGUAGE MENU.

3. Press the Item key. LANG=ENGLISH* appears as the first menu item unless the

language has already been changed.

4. Press the Value key until you see the language you want to select.

5. Press the Enter key. An asterisk (*) appears next to the language, showing that it

is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Chapter 2. Using the Operator Panel 41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Understanding Common Messages

The message display area is located at the top of the operator panel. The following

table describes the most common display messages. For a list of all messages, see

Appendix B, “Understanding Printer Messages” on page 215.

Message

Description/Response

READY

The printer is ready to receive a print job.

Response: None required.

WARMING UP...

The printer is warming up. When it is ready to print, the message

changes to READY.

Response: None required.

I/O INITIALIZING

OFFLINE

The network interface card is initializing.

Response: None required.

The printer is offline and cannot receive print jobs.

Response: To receive printing jobs, press the Online key.

PCL PARALLEL

The printer is online and receiving data for a PCL5e print job through

the parallel port.

Response: None required.

PS PARALLEL

The printer is online and receiving data for a PostScript print job

through the parallel port.

Response: None required.

02 TONER LOW

06 COVER OPEN

The toner is either low or depleted.

Response: Install a new toner cartridge. See “Changing the Toner

Cartridge” on page 140.

A printer cover is open.

Response: Make sure all printer covers are closed.

LOAD paper-size IN

tray

A tray is out of paper. (Similar messages are displayed for the

auxiliary tray and optional envelope feeder.)

Response: Load paper. See “Loading Paper” on page 88.

42 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus

This chapter describes how to navigate through the printer menus. The following table

describes the basic function of each menu and lists the page where you can find more

information.

Notes:

1. Note that several of the menus and menu items listed in this book appear on your

operator panel only if you have a particular option installed. To see a list of menus

you can access and options you have installed, print a printer configuration page.

See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

2. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

Use this menu

To do this

See page

TEST MENU

Print the configuration page, font lists, and printer test pages; reset

the printer to use factory defaults; print a hexadecimal dump for

troubleshooting purposes.

PAPER MENU

CONFIG MENU

Select input trays, output bins, paper sizes, and duplex printing

options.

Define how the printer handles paper jams and certain other error

conditions; define toner density, power savings mode, and print

quality.

MEMCONFIG MENU

PARALLEL MENU

Define whether the printer saves data stream information when it

switches ports.

Define how the printer handles jobs sent through the parallel port,

including the data stream, bi-directional communications, and the

timeout setting.

PCL MENU

Define how the printer handles PCL5e jobs including number of

copies, page size, page orientation, lines per page, font source, and

default font.

PS MENU

Define how the printer handles PostScript jobs, including number of

copies and whether error messages are printed.

TOKEN RING MENU

ETHERNET MENU

COAX SCS MENU

TWINAX SCS MENU

Define the data stream, timeout, and network address values for the

token-ring attachment.

Define the data stream, timeout, and network address values for the

Ethernet attachment.

Define how the printer handles SCS jobs sent through the coax

attachment.

Define how the printer handles SCS jobs sent through the twinax

attachment.

COAX SETUP MENU

Configure the coax environment.

Configure the twinax environment.

TWINAX SETUP MENU

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Use this menu

To do this

See page

COAX DSC/DSE MENU

Define how the printer handles DSC/DSE jobs sent through the coax

attachment.

IPDS MENU

Define how the printer handles IPDS jobs.

MACHINE INFO MENU

Displays page counts, the error log, and the toner and fuser usage

counters.

LANGUAGE MENU

Define the language the printer uses to display operator panel

messages and menus.

The following is a menu map you can use as a quick reference for navigating through

the menus. You can also print a printer configuration page and use that page as a

menu map.

Note: Depending upon your printer's configuration, some menus may not be

displayed. For instance, if you do not have a token ring network interface card installed,

the token ring menus are not displayed.

44 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Printer 24

Power

Attention

Enter

Cancel Print

Page Eject

Value

Online

Continue

Item

Shift

Figure 11. Operator Panel Menu Map

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Test Menu

Use the Test Menu to display basic information about the printer and to perform basic

troubleshooting tasks.

Notes:

1. To perform the action associated with the menu item you select, press the Enter

key.

2. The actual menu items you see depend on what options you have installed. To

find out what options you have installed, print a Printer Configuration Page. See

“Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

4. If IPDS is the active data stream when the printer is taken offline, the following

Test Menu items will not be available:

CONFIG PAGE

PRINT PS FONTS

PRINT PCL FONTS

PRINT PS DEMO

PRINT SCS CHARS

These items reappear after a port timeout occurs (the length of the timeout

depends on the host or network attachment you use); they also reappear if you

power off the printer, wait twenty seconds, and then power on.

TEST MENU ITEM

Description

CONFIG PAGE

Prints the Printer Configuration Page. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32 for more information.

PRINT PS FONTS

PRINT PCL FONTS

Prints a list of PostScript fonts installed on the printer. See “Printing a List of

PostScript Fonts” on page 39 for more information.

Prints a list of PCL5e fonts installed on the printer. See “Printing a List of PCL5e

Fonts” on page 39 for more information.

PRINT IPDS FONTS

PRINT PS DEMO

CONTINUOUS TEST

RESET PRINTER

Prints a list of resident IPDS fonts installed on the printer.

Prints the PostScript demo page.

Prints continuous test pages. To stop the test, press the Cancel Print key.

Cancels the current print job.

PRINT SCS

Prints the SCS code page (character set).

CHARACTERS

46 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TEST MENU ITEM

Description

FACTORY DEFAULT

Resets settings to the factory defaults. Note that some values, do not get reset.

These values include LANGUAGE, AUXSIZE, PCL SAVE, PS SAVE, BI-DI, IP

ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, GATEWAY ADDRESS, and MAC ADDRESS.

Note: To reset all values, do one of the following:

For A4 paper: power the printer off and then power the printer on while

simultaneously pressing the Cancel Print key.

For letter paper: power the printer off and then power the printer on while

simultaneously pressing the Online key.

ONLINE HEX PRT

CANCEL ONLN HEX

ONLINE HEX PRT prints an ASCII hexadecimal dump for troubleshooting purposes.

After you select this item, it changes to CANCEL ONLN HEX. Data that is sent to

the printer is not interpreted but is printed as raw data in hexadecimal values. To

stop printing data in hexadecimal values, select CANCEL ONLN HEX.

CX HEX PRT

CANCEL CX HEX

CX HEX PRT prints an EBCDIC hexadecimal dump of non-IPDS data coming

across the coax cable; you can use the dump for troubleshooting coax problems.

After you select this item, it changes to CANCEL CX HEX. Data that is sent to the

printer is not interpreted but is printed as raw data in hexadecimal values. To stop

printing data in hexadecimal values, select CANCEL CX HEX.

TX HEX PRT

CANCEL TX HEX

TX HEX PRT prints a hexadecimal dump for troubleshooting twinax problems. After

you select this item, it changes to CANCEL TX HEX. Data that is sent to the printer

is not interpreted but is printed as raw data in hexadecimal values. To stop printing

data in hexadecimal values, select CANCEL CX HEX.

FORMAT DISK

STAPLE TEST

Formats the optional hard drive.

Staples a test page to make sure the stapler is working correctly. Usually you

select this test after replacing a staple cartridge or if the stapler is not stapling

paper. The Stapler test uses A3, A4, B4, 11 x 17, legal, or letter size paper to

staple. One of these paper sizes must be loaded in the printer to perform this test.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper Menu

Use the Paper Menu to select input trays, output bins, paper sizes, and duplex printing

options. The following table describes the settings you can change from the Paper

Menu. An asterisk (*) next to a value means it is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Print job values, such as paper size, set with the printer driver or application or

data stream, such as IPDS, override values set at the printer.

3. The actual menu items you see depend on what options you have installed. To

find out what options you have installed, print a Printer Configuration Page. See

“Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32 for more

information.

4. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

PAPER MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

SOURCE

TRAY 1*

TRAY 2

Selects the default paper tray to use. Only installed trays appear

in the list.

TRAY 3

AUXTRAY

ENVELOPE

TRAY 1 and TRAY 2 are standard input trays.

TRAY 3 is the 2000-sheet input drawer. If this feature is

installed, then TRAY3 becomes the default paper tray

source. If this feature is not installed, it does not appear on

the menu.

AUXTRAY is the flip-down tray located on the right side of

the printer. This tray supports transparencies and labels and

also envelopes and paper.

ENVELOPE is the optional envelope feeder. If this feature is

not installed, it does not appear on the menu.

To locate the paper trays, see Figure 2 on page 4.

48 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PAPER MENU

ITEM

VALUE

MAIN*

Description

OUTPUT

Specifies the default output bin or tray.

FACE UP

MAIN is the face-down output tray. This tray can hold up to

500 sheets.

FACE-UP is the face-up output tray. This tray can hold up to

100 sheets. If the 2000-sheet finisher is installed, the

FACE-UP value will not be displayed as the face-up output

tray is replaced by the 2000-sheet finisher.

The upper (UP), middle (MID) and lower (LOW) output bins

are supported by the optional 2000-sheet finisher. If this

feature is not installed, these bins do not appear on the

menu. The upper bin can hold up to 600 sheets; the middle

and lower bins can hold up to 700 sheets each. (Actual

number of sheets is dependent upon type of paper.)

UP FACE-DOWN

MID FACE-DOWN

LOW FACE-DOWN

UP FACE-UP

MID FACE-UP

LOW FACE-UP

CONTINUOUS

You can choose whether output is placed face-up or

face-down on the 2000-sheet finisher output bins. For

example, if you want output to be placed face-up in the upper

bin, you would choose UP FACE-UP.

Continuous is supported by the 2000-Sheet Finisher which

enables paper to be stacked in one bin until the bin fills up

and then stacked in the next bin. Paper is stacked

face-down.

When you select CONTINUOUS, the upper bin is the default

bin. After the upper bin fills up with paper, paper is stacked in

middle bin. But if the middle bin (or lower bin) already has

paper stacked in the bin from another print job, an error

message, 29 Output Full is displayed. This is because paper

is not to be stacked on top of an existing print job; this

enables you to find print jobs quicker.

Note: If you want to use the staple function with the

2000-Sheet Finisher, you need to select that function from

the printer driver. You cannot select the staple function from

the operator panel. Each user must determine whether they

want their print job to be stapled. Also, review the printer

driver online help for information on how to select the type of

stapling you want for your print job.

TRAY SWITCH

ON*

OFF

Specifies whether or not to switch to another paper tray if the

current one is empty.

ON—specifies that if the current tray does not contain the

paper size specified by the job, the printer will automatically

look in other trays for the right size of paper.

OFF—specifies no switching. A message is displayed when

a job specifies a paper size that is not available in the current

tray.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PAPER MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

MANUAL

OFF*

Specifies whether or not paper is to be fed manually from the

auxiliary tray:

OFF—paper feeding is automatic, not manual.

ON—paper feeding is manual, one sheet at a time.

Messages on the operator panel prompt you for each sheet.

Notes:

1. When MANUAL is set to ON, you can only print from the

auxiliary tray.

2. PostScript jobs can override MANUAL=OFF; however,

they cannot override MANUAL=ON. Therefore, if you do

set MANUAL to ON, make sure you reset MANUAL to

OFF after you complete the jobs you want to print

manually.

AUXSIZE

LETTER*

LEGAL

11 X 17

Defines the paper or envelope size being used in the auxiliary

tray.

EXEC

COM10

MONARCH

B5-JIS

B5-ISO

FOLIO

STAMNT

JPOSTD

ENVSIZE

COM10*

Defines the envelope size being used in the envelope feeder.

MONARCH

JPOSTD

B5-ISO

50 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PAPER MENU

ITEM

VALUE

LONG*

Description

BINDING

Specifies how to print pages in duplex mode. BINDING is only

displayed if DUPLEX is set to ON.

SHORT

LONG—prints as if the paper is to be bound along the long

edge of the paper. (On the left for portrait documents, along

the top for landscape documents.) Most documents are

printed using LONG.

SHORT—prints as if the paper is to be bound along the short

edge of the paper. (On the top for portrait documents, on the

left for landscape documents.) Used with documents such as

calendars and presentations where you want to turn the

pages from bottom to top.

DUPLEX

OFF*

Specifies whether to print on one side or both if the duplex unit is

installed.

TRAY RENUM

OFF*

1<>2

Specifies tray renumbering (you can only renumber trays 1 and 2;

not tray 3, which is the 2000-sheet input drawer.)

OFF—no tray renumbering

1<>2—tells the printer to treat TRAY1 as TRAY2, and vice

versa.

Network Administrator Tip

If your users want to use the stapling function with the optional 2000-sheet finisher,

they need to select that function from the printer driver. The stapling function cannot

be accessed from the operator panel. Each user must decide if they want their print

job stapled. Make sure your users are aware that the stapling function can staple

20 sheets together in one set. Each bin can hold up to 30 sets of stapled paper if

the total number of sheets is less than 300. (Or a maximum of 15 sets of 20 sheets

stapled together per set.)

Configuration (Config) Menu

Use the Configuration Menu to configure the printer. The following table describes the

settings you can change from the Configuration Menu. An asterisk (*) next to a value

means it is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Print job values, such as paper size, set with the printer driver or application or

data stream, such as IPDS, override values set at the printer.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

CONFIG MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

JAMRECOVERY

OFF*

Sets the JAMRECOVERY function on or off.

OFF—the printer does not keep an image of the printed

page. Jammed pages are not reprinted.

ON—the printer keeps the image for a printed page until the

page successfully exits the printer. Jammed pages are

automatically reprinted. Selecting ON can decrease the

performance of your printer.

AUTOCONTINUE

ON*

OFF

Sets the auto-continue function on or off.

ON—following certain types of errors (such as memory

allocation errors), the printer pauses for thirty seconds, and

then continues running.

OFF—following the same types of errors, the printer stops

and waits for operator intervention. (Generally, the operator

either presses the Continue key to continue printing, or the

Cancel Print key to cancel the current job.)

DENSITY

PWRSAV

Sets the toner density. nn can be from 0 to 15 where 0 is the

least dense (lightest) and 15 is the most dense (darkest). 6 is the

default value. Please note that increasing the density setting can

increase the amount of toner used. If you find you are using more

than the expected amount of toner, you may want to decrease

the density setting.

30 MIN*

1HR

2HR

Specifies how long the printer is inactive before it goes into

power-savings (sleep) mode. In this mode, the printer powers

down most of its systems and therefore requires extra time to

warm up when the next print is requested.

3HR

4HR

OFF

15 MIN

QUALITY

REFINE*

ECONO

NORMAL

Specifies the print quality.

REFINE—tells the printer to smooth edges. This setting may

use more toner than the ECONO or NORMAL modes.

ECONO—tells the printer to produce lighter output, thus

saving toner. (ECONO is the same as TonerMiser.)

NORMAL—normal quality.

Note: The printer driver term for REFINE is Edge Refinement.

52 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Administrator Tip

When selecting the Density and Quality settings, keep in mind that these settings

affect toner usage. For example, if you select Density value of 12 and Quality value

of Refine, you will use more toner per print job than a Density value of 6 and

Quality value of Econo. For optimum toner usage, try setting Density to 3 and

Quality to Econo.

The settings you use will depend upon the types of jobs your users print. For

instance, if your users print primarily memos and word processing jobs, try using

the Quality setting of Econo with a lower Density setting. If your users print primarily

spreadsheets or documents with complex graphics, try using the Quality setting of

REFINE and a higher density setting.

If your users include photographs in their print jobs, you may want to use the

NORMAL setting instead of REFINE. Often photographs are scanned or copied at a

low resolution and using the REFINE mode may not improve the quality of the

photographs.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Configuration (Memconfig) Menu

Use the Memory Configuration Menu to define whether or not the printer saves data

stream information when it switches ports. The following table describes the settings

you can change from the Memory Configuration Menu. An asterisk (*) next to a value

means it is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. The actual menu items you see depend on how much memory and what options

you have installed. To find out what options you have installed, print a Printer

Configuration Page. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page”

on page 32 for more information.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

MEMCONFIG

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

PCL SAVE

OFF*

Specifies whether or not the printer saves PCL5e information

(downloaded fonts, macros, patterns) when it switches from

PCL5e to another data stream:

OFF—the printer does not save data.

ON—the printer saves data. This option appears only when

your printer has enough memory installed, which for simplex

printing is 10 MB and for duplex printing is 14 MB.

PS2 SAVE

OFF*

Specifies whether or not the printer saves PostScript information

(downloaded fonts, macros, patterns) when it switches from

PostScript to another data stream:

OFF—the printer does not save data.

ON—the printer saves data. This option appears only when

your printer has enough memory installed, which for simplex

printing is 10 MB and for duplex printing is 14 MB.

54 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parallel Menu

Use the Parallel Menu to define how the printer handles communications over the

parallel cable attachment. The following table describes the settings you can change

from the Parallel Menu. An asterisk (*) next to a value means it is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

PARALLEL

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

PERSONALTY

AUTO*

PCL

Specifies how the printer treats jobs it receives over the parallel

attachment.

AUTO—the printer determines if the data stream is PCL5e or

PostScript and handles it accordingly. This is the

recommended value.

PCL—the printer treats all data streams as PCL5e.

PS—the printer treats all data streams as PostScript. This

option appears only if the PostScript SIMM is installed.

BI-DI

ON*

OFF

Turns bi-directional communications over the parallel attachment

on or off.

ON—the printer receives and sends messages to the host.

OFF—the printer receives messages from the host, but does

not send messages back.

PORT TMEOUT

nnn

Specifies how many seconds the printer waits for data before it

determines there is no more data to receive for the job. The

printer then checks other attachments for jobs, if other

attachments are installed. The valid range is 5 to 300 seconds.

The default value is 15 seconds.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL Menu

Use the PCL Menu to define the way the printer handles PCL5e jobs. The following

table describes the settings you can change from the PCL Menu. An asterisk (*) next

to a value means it is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Values set in PCL5e print jobs (either by the print application or the printer driver)

override PCL Menu values you set at the printer.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

PCL MENU ITEM

VALUE

AUTO*

Description

PAGEPROT

Sets page protection:

AUTO—the printer protects the minimum amount of memory

necessary to print the page.

ON—the printer reserves enough memory to process an

entire page without compression before it prints the page.

This helps in the rare case where the printer compression

function causes a loss of quality in complex graphics. This

setting is available only when the printer has enough memory

installed. If the printer has the standard 4 MB of memory

installed, this function is not displayed. You need at least 8

MB of memory installed to use the page protection function.

See “Using Memory Reduction Technology with Page

Protection” on page 200 for information on memory

requirements.

COPIES

nnn

Specifies how many copies of each job to print. nnn can be from

1 to 999. 1 is the default.

56 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL MENU ITEM

VALUE

LETTER*

Description

PAGESIZE

Specifies the default page size for PCL5e jobs.

LEGAL

11 X 17

EXEC

COM10

MONARCH

B5-JIS

B5-ISO

FOLIO

STAMNT

JPOSTD

ORIENTATION

Specifies the default page orientation.

P—portrait (taller than wide)

L—landscape (wider than tall)

FORM

nnn LINES

Specifies the number of lines per page the printer prints before it

starts a new page. nnn can be from 5 to 128. 60 is the default.

FNTSRC

INTERNAL*

SOFT

Specifies which font source the printer checks first for a specified

font:

INTERNAL—use the printer's resident fonts first

SOFT—use downloaded fonts first

FONTNUM

Specifies the default font. nnn is the number of the font. The

default is 0. Valid values are 0 to 58. To display a list of

available fonts and their corresponding numbers, select PRINT

PCL FONTS from the Test Menu. See “Printing a List of PCL5e

Fonts” on page 39 for more information.

PTSIZE

PITCH

nn.nn

Specifies the point size of the default font, if it is an outline font.

Valid values are 4 to 999.75. The default is 10.

Note: Point size is only displayed if an outline font is used.

Otherwise, this item is not displayed.

Specifies the pitch to use for the default font, if the font is

bitmapped (raster). Valid values are .44 to 99.99. The default is

10.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL MENU ITEM

VALUE

ROMAN-8*

Description

Specifies the symbol set to use.

SYMSET

ISO L1

ISO L2

ISO L5

PC-8

PC-8D/N

PC-850

PC-852

PC8-TK

WIN L1

WIN L2

WIN L5

DESKTOP

PS TEXT

VN INTL

VN US

MS PUBL

MATH-8

PS MATH

VN MATH

PI FONT

LEGAL

ISO 4

ISO 6

ISO 11

ISO 15

ISO 17

ISO 21

ISO 60

ISO 69

WIN 3.0

58 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PS Menu

Use the PS Menu to define the way the printer handles PostScript jobs. The following

table describes the settings you can change from the PS Menu. An asterisk (*) next to

a value means it is the factory default. This menu appears only if you have the

PostScript SIMM installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Values set in PostScript print jobs override PS Menu values you set at the printer.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

PS MENU ITEM

VALUE

AUTO*

Description

PAGEPROT

Sets page protection:

AUTO—the printer uses the minimum amount of memory

necessary to print a page.

ON—the printer reserves enough memory to process an

entire page without compression before it prints the page.

This can help in the rare case where the printer compression

scheme causes a loss of quality in complex graphics. This

setting is available only when the printer has enough

memory.

COPIES

nnn

Specifies how many copies of each job to print. nnn can be from

1 to 999. 1 is the default.

PRINT ERRS

OFF*

Specifies how the printer handles PostScript errors:

OFF—the printer cancels the job, but does not print an error

page.

ON—the printer prints an error page and cancels the job.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Token Ring Menu

Network Administrator's Tip

For information about configuring the token-ring attachment, please see IBM

Network Printers: Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide, which comes with

the Token-Ring Network Interface Card. Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network

Addresses” on page 201 describes how to define the IP address, default gateway

address, and subnet mask from the operator panel.

Use the Token Ring Menu to configure the token-ring attachment. The following table

describes the settings you can change from the Token Ring Menu. An asterisk (*) next

to a value means it is the factory default. This menu appears only if you have the

token-ring attachment installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that is now active.

2. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

TOKEN RING

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

PERSONALTY

AUTO*

PCL

Specifies how the printer treats jobs it receives over the

token-ring attachment:

IPDS

AUTO—the printer examines the data stream and

handles it accordingly.

PCL—the printer treats all data streams as PCL5e.

PS—the printer treats all data streams as PostScript.

This option appears only if the PostScript SIMM is

installed.

IPDS—the printer treats all data streams as IPDS.

This option appears only if the IPDS SIMM is installed.

PORT TMEOUT

IP ADDRESS

nnn

Specifies the number of seconds the printer waits for data

before it determines there is no more data to receive for

the job. The printer then checks other attachments for

jobs, if other attachments are installed. Valid values are 5

to 300. The default is 15 seconds.

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Specifies the printer's internet protocol address. Consult

with your network or LAN administrator before changing

this value. See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network

Addresses” on page 201 for more information.

60 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TOKEN RING

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

SUBNET MASK

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Specifies the printer's subnet mask. Consult with your

network or LAN administrator before changing this value.

See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network Addresses” on

page 201 for more information.

GATEWAY

ADDRESS

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

nn.nn.nn.nn.nn.nn

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. Consult

with your network or LAN administrator before changing

this value. See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network

Addresses” on page 201 for information on setting the

address.

MAC ADDRESS

Specifies the MAC (medium access control) number of the

printer.

Note: Normally, the MAC ADDRESS should be set to the

unique MAC ADDRESS on the network interface card.

You can, however, also use the MAC ADDRESS field to

define locally administered addresses (LAA). Resetting

the printer to factory defaults sets the LAA back to the

MAC address. Each LAA must be unique, so make sure

to consult with your network or LAN administrator before

changing this value. See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer

Network Addresses” on page 201 for information on

setting the address.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ethernet Menu

Network Administrator's Tip

For information about configuring the Etherent attachment, please see IBM Network

Printers: Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide, which comes with the

Ethernet Network Interface Card. Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network Addresses”

on page 201 describes how to define the IP address, default gateway address, and

subnet mask from the operator panel.

Use the Ethernet Menu to configure the Ethernet attachment. The following table

describes the settings you can change from the Ethernet Menu. An asterisk (*) next to

a value means it is the factory default. This menu appears only if you have the

Ethernet attachment installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

ETHERNET MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

PERSONALTY

AUTO*

PCL

Specifies how the printer treats jobs it receives over the

Ethernet attachment:

IPDS

AUTO—the printer examines the data stream and

handles it accordingly.

PCL—the printer treats all data streams as PCL5e.

PS—the printer treats all data streams as PostScript.

This option appears only if the PostScript SIMM is

installed.

IPDS—the printer treats all data streams as IPDS.

This option appears only if the IPDS SIMM is installed.

PORT TMEOUT

IP ADDRESS

nnn

Specifies the number of seconds the printer waits for data

before it determines there is no more data to receive for

the job. The printer then checks other attachments for

jobs, if other attachments are installed. Valid values are 5

to 300. The default is 15 seconds.

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Specifies the printer's internet protocol address. Consult

with your network or LAN administrator before changing

this value. See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network

Addresses” on page 201 for information on setting the

address.

62 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ETHERNET MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

SUBNET MASK

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Specifies the printer's subnet mask. Consult with your

network or LAN administrator before changing this value.

See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network Addresses” on

page 201 for information on setting the address.

GATEWAY

ADDRESS

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

nn.nn.nn.nn.nn.nn

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. Consult

with your network or LAN administrator before changing

this value. See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network

Addresses” on page 201 for information on setting the

address.

MAC ADDRESS

Specifies the MAC (medium access control) number of the

printer.

Note: Normally, the MAC ADDRESS should be set to the

unique MAC ADDRESS on the network interface card.

You can, however, also use the MAC ADDRESS field to

define locally administered addresses (LAA). Resetting

the printer to factory defaults sets the LAA back to the

MAC address. Each LAA must be unique, so make sure

to consult with your network or LAN administrator before

changing this value.

See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network Addresses” on

page 201 for information on setting the address.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coax SCS Menu

Use the Coax SCS Menu to define how the printer handles SCS communications over

the coax attachment. The following table describes the settings you can change from

the Coax SCS Menu. An asterisk (*) next to a value means it is the factory default.

This menu appears only if you have the coax attachment installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Values set in print jobs override Coax SCS Menu values set at the printer.

3. For more information about configuring the coax attachment, see IBM Network

Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide.

4. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

COAX SCS

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

TRAY1

COR*

C-PORT

PORT

Specifies the default orientation for jobs printed from each tray.

TRAY1 and TRAY2 are standard input trays. TRAY 3 is

2000-sheet input drawer. AUX is the auxiliary tray. Each input

can be assigned one of the following default orientations:

TRAY2

TRAY3

AUX

LAND

COR—computer output reduction: Printing in landscape with

the logical page reduced to fit more data on the physical

page. The printer reduces vertical spacing and uses a

smaller font with less space between letters.

C-PORT—compressed portrait: printing in portrait, but with

spaces reduced between characters (horizontal compression)

so that more text fits on a line. This allows more characters

per line.

PORT—portrait: the page has normal, upright business letter

orientation. (For envelopes from the auxiliary tray, PORT

specifies normal envelope orientation.)

LAND—landscape: the page is wider than long.

64 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COAX SCS

MENU ITEM

VALUE

ENABLE*

Description

APO

Enables or disables automatic print orientation.

DISABLE

ENABLE—if the requested dimensions of the job fit on the

paper, the page is printed either in portrait or landscape,

whichever better fits the dimensions. If the requested

dimensions do not fit on the paper, the default orientation for

the tray (COR, PORT, LAND, or C-PORT) determines how

the sheet is printed.

DISABLE—the page prints using the default orientation for

the tray (COR, PORT, LAND, or C-PORT).

Notes:

1. Values specified in the data stream override values set at the

printer.

2. The factory defaults (orientation set to COR and

APO=ENABLE) give you the most flexibility.

3. The requested dimensions are determined by the values of

CPI, LINE SPACING, MPP, and MPL for the job. These

values can be set in the data stream or on the Coax SCS

Menu.

LPI

Specifies a default lines per inch value for jobs received over the

coax attachment. Valid values are 0, 6, and 8. The default is 6.

0 specifies either the value specified in the job or the PCL default

value for the printer.

LINE SPACING

CPI

Specifies single or double spacing:

1—single spacing

2—double spacing

Specifies the default characters per inch, or pitch. nn can be 0,

10,12,15,16.7, 20, or 27. The default is 10. 0 specifies a

proportional font (FGID 1452). Note that proportional fonts use

proportional spacing, which may cause unexpected results (for

example, tabular data may appear misaligned).

CASE

MPL

DUAL*

MONO

Specifies the case of the printed text:

DUAL—characters print in the case received

MONO—all characters print in uppercase

nnn

Specifies the maximum page length (MPL) in lines per page.

Valid values are 1 to 255. 66 is the default. If the MPL value is

set to 1, no vertical formatting will be done, so no form feeds will

be generated for your data. Your application must specify form

feeds.

MPP

Specifies the maximum print position (MPP). Valid values are 1

to 255. 132 is the default. If the MPP value is set to 1, no

horizontal formatting will be done, so no new lines will be

generated for your data. Your application must specify new lines.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COAX SCS

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

CODE PAGE

nnn

Specifies the code page to use. Code page 037 is the default.

037

273

275

277

278

280

281

284

285

286

287

288

289

297

500

871

US, Canada, Netherlands, Portugal

Austrian/German

Brazil

Danish/Norwegian

Finnish/Swedish

Italian

Japanese

Spanish

UK English

Austrian/German (alternate)

Danish/Norwegian (alternate)

Finnish/Swedish (alternate)

Spanish

French

Belgium, Switzerland / International

Icelandic

TBM

LBM

nnnn

The top binding margin (TBM) determines the position of line 1

relative to the top edge of the printable area when printing in

portrait or landscape orientation. TBM is measured in tenths of

an inch, with a default of 0. Valid values are 0 to 99. It applies to

all paper sources.

The left binding margin (LBM) determines the position of column

1 relative to the left edge of the printable area when printing in

portrait or landscape orientation. LBM is measured in tenths of

an inch, with a default of 0. Valid values are 0 to 99. It applies to

all paper sources.

66 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Twinax SCS Menu

Use the Twinax SCS Menu to define how the printer handles SCS data over the twinax

attachment. The following table describes the settings you can change from the Twinax

SCS Menu. An asterisk (*) next to a value means it is the factory default. This menu

appears only if you have the twinax attachment installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Values set in print jobs override Twinax SCS Menu values set at the printer.

3. For more information about configuring the twinax attachment, see IBM Network

Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide.

4. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

TWINAX SCS

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

TRAY1

COR*

C-PORT

PORT

Specifies the default orientation for jobs printed from each tray

listed on the menu. TRAY1 and TRAY2 are standard input trays.

TRAY 3 is 2000-sheet input drawer. AUX is the auxiliary tray.

Each input can be assigned one of the following default

orientations

TRAY2

TRAY3

AUX

LAND

COR—computer output reduction: Printing in landscape with

the logical page reduced to fit more data on the physical

page. The printer reduces vertical spacing and uses a

smaller font with less space between letters.

C-PORT—compressed portrait: printing in portrait, but with

spaces reduced between characters (horizontal compression)

so that more text fits on a line. This allows more characters

per line.

PORT—portrait: the page has normal, upright business letter

orientation.

LAND—landscape: the page is wider than long.

LPI

Specifies a default lines per inch value. 0 specifies either the

value specified in the job, or the PCL default value for the printer.

CPI

Specifies the default characters per inch, or pitch. nn can be 5,

10, 12, 15, 17.1, 20, or 27. The default is 10.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TWINAX SCS

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

CODE PAGE

nnn

Specifies the default code page to use. The default value is code

page 037.

037

273

274

275

277

278

280

281

282

284

285

297

500

871

U.S.A. and Canada

Austrian/German

Belgium

Brazil

Danish/Norwegian

Finnish/Swedish

Italy

Japanese (Latin)

Portugal

Spanish (Latin America)

United Kingdom

France

Multinational (International #5)

Iceland

APO

ENABLE*

DISABLE

Enables or disables automatic print orientation.

ENABLE—if the requested dimensions of the job fit on the

paper, the page is printed either in portrait or landscape,

whichever better fits the dimensions. If the requested

dimensions do not fit on the paper, the default orientation for

the tray (COR, PORT, LAND, or C-PORT) determines how

the sheet is printed.

DISABLE—the page prints using the default orientation for

the tray (COR, PORT, LAND, or C-PORT).

Notes:

1. Values specified in the data stream override values set at the

printer.

2. The factory defaults (orientation set to COR and

APO=ENABLE) give you the most flexibility.

3. The requested dimensions are determined by the values of

CPI, MPP, and MPL for the job. These values can be set in

the data stream. CPI can be set on the Twinax SCS menu.

The twinax default values for MPP and MPL cannot be set

from a menu; they are 132 for MPP and 62 for MPL.

68 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coax Setup Menu

Use the Coax Setup Menu to configure the coax attachment. The following table

describes the settings you can change from the Coax Setup Menu. An asterisk (*) next

to a value means it is the factory default. This menu appears only if you have the coax

attachment installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. For more information about configuring the coax attachment, see IBM Network

Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

COAX SETUP

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

PORT TMEOUT

IRQ TMEOUT

HLD TMEOUT

BUSY TMEOUT

nnn

Specifies the number of seconds the printer waits for data before

it determines there is no more data to receive for the job. The

printer then checks other installed attachments, and switches to

attachments with jobs waiting. nnn can be from 0 to 255. The

default is 90 seconds.

Specifies when an IRQ (intervention required) timeout is sent.

This tells the printer how long to wait for an intervention required

condition to be corrected before notifying the host of the error. nn

can be from 0 to 20 minutes. The default is 1 minute. 0

specifies to never send an IRQ timeout.

Specifies the hold timeout value. This value tells the printer how

long to wait if the printer is offline for an intervention required

condition to be corrected. After this time elapses, the host is

notified of the error. nnnn can be from 0 to 20 minutes. The

default is 10 minutes. 0 specifies to never send a hold time out.

nnn

Specifies the busy timeout value. This specifies the amount of

time to wait (when the printer is connected to multiple ports) for

control to be returned to the coax attachment, before notifying the

host. nnn can be from 0 to 999 minutes. The default is 20

minutes. 0 specifies to never send a busy timeout.

EAB

ENABLE*

DISABLE

Enables or disables the extended attribute buffer.

BUFFER SIZE

1920*

960

Specifies the buffer size in bytes.

2560

3440

3564

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COAX SETUP

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

EARLY COMPL

ON*

OFF

Turns early print completion on or off for non-IPDS data sent over

the coax attachment. To turn early print completion on or off for

IPDS data, use the EARLY COMPL item on the IPDS Menu.

ON—sends an “order complete” as soon as data is received.

OFF—waits until the print job is physically complete to send

“order complete.”

PA1

PA2

none

Selecting this value and pressing the Enter key sends a PA1

signal to the host.

Note: This applies to SCS only; not DSC/DSE or IPDS.

Selecting this value and pressing the Enter key sends a PA2

signal to the host.

Note: This applies to SCS only; not DSC/DSE or IPDS.

70 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Twinax Setup Menu

Use the Twinax Setup Menu to configure the twinax attachment. The following table

describes the settings you can change from the Twinax Setup Menu. This menu

appears only if you have the twinax attachment installed. An asterisk (*) next to a

value means it is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

Important! If you change SCS ADDR or IPDS ADDR, you must power off the

printer, wait ten seconds, and then power on the printer for the new value to take

effect.

2. For more information about configuring the twinax attachment, see IBM Network

Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

TWINAX SETUP

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

SCS ADDR

OFF*

The twinax hardware address of the SCS port. n can be from 0 to

Notes:

1. SCS ADDR and IPDS ADDR cannot be set to the same

value.

2. If you change SCS ADDR or IPDS ADDR, you must power

off the printer, wait ten seconds, and then power on the

printer for the new value to take effect.

3. When the optional IPDS SIMM is installed, each IBM

Network Printer can act as two separate printers on the same

twinax port. (The printer cannot be attached to two different

twinax systems using the same twinax card.) One “printer”

prints SCS data to one address (SCS ADDR), and the other

prints IPDS to another address (IPDS ADDR).

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TWINAX SETUP

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

IPDS ADDR

OFF*

The twinax hardware address of the IPDS port. n can be from 0

to 6.

Notes:

1. SCS ADDR and IPDS ADDR cannot be set to the same

value.

2. If you change SCS ADDR or IPDS ADDR, you must power

off the printer, wait ten seconds, and then power on the

printer for the new value to take effect.

3. When the optional IPDS SIMM is installed, each IBM

Network Printer can act as two separate printers on the same

twinax port. (The printer cannot be attached to two different

twinax systems using the same twinax card.) One “printer”

prints SCS data to one address (SCS ADDR), and the other

prints IPDS to another address (IPDS ADDR).

BUFFER SIZE

1024*

256

Specifies the IPDS buffer size in bytes. The SCS buffer size is

always 256.

PORT TMEOUT

nnn

Specifies the number of seconds the printer waits for data before

it determines there is no more data to receive for the job. The

printer then checks other installed attachments, and switches to

attachments with jobs waiting. from 0 to 255. The default is 90

seconds.

72 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coax DSC/DSE Menu

Use the Coax DSC/DSE Menu to define how the printer handles DSC/DSE

communications over the coax attachment. The following table describes the settings

you can change from the Coax DSC/DSE Menu. The options you specify apply only to

DSC/DSE mode. An asterisk (*) next to a value means it is the factory default. This

menu appears only if you have the coax attachment installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. For more information about configuring the coax attachment, see IBM Network

Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

COAX DSC/DSE

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

PRINT IMAGE

ON*

OFF

Selects printing options in non-SCS mode.

–

True Screen image in Local Copy

True Screen image in Non-SCS print

Unformatted print in Local Copy

Unformatted print in Non-SCS print

OFF

–

Null line suppression in Local Copy

Null line suppression in Non-SCS print

Formatted print in Local Copy

Formatted print in Non-SCS print

CR AT MPP+1

ON*

OFF

Sets a carriage return relative to the maximum print position

(MPP).

ON—a new line occurs when the carriage return occurs at

MPP+1. The next print position is at the first print position of

the new line (current line + 1, column 1).

OFF—no new line occurs when the carriage return occurs at

MPP+1. The next print position is at the first print position of

the current line (current line, column 1).

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COAX DSC/DSE

MENU ITEM

VALUE

Description

Forces a new line at MPP+1.

NL AT MPP+1

ON*

OFF

ON—an additional new line occurs at MPP+1, followed by

the carriage return. The next print position is at the first print

position of the new line (current line + 2, column 1).

OFF—no additional new line when the new line occurs at

MPP+1. The next print position is at the first print position of

the next line (current line + 1, column 1).

FF DATA

ON*

OFF

Forces the printer to eject the current page.

ON—when a Form Feed command is encountered, the

current page is ejected and the form is indexed to the first

line of the next page. The next print position is at the first

print position of the first line of the next page (next form, line

1, column 1).

OFF—when a Form Feed command is encountered, the

current page is ejected and the form is indexed to the first

line of the next page and spaced one position. The next

print position is at the first print position plus 1 of the first line

of the next page (next form, line 1, column 2).

FF LAST

ON*

OFF

Determines where to position the next character when the Form

Feed command occurs at the end of the print buffer.

ON—an automatic new line occurs after the print order is

completed (next form, line 2, column 1).

OFF—suppress automatic new line after the print order is

completed (next form, line 1, column 1).

FF VALID

OFF*

Determines when a form feed command is valid.

ON—a Form Feed command occurs whenever it is

encountered.

OFF—a Form Feed command occurs only if it appears at the

first print position in a line, or at MPP+1. Treats a form feed

at other locations as blanks.

AUTO FUNCTION

OFF*

Selects whether the next print position will be on a new line or a

new page.

OFF—a new line will be executed automatically at the end

the print order (when printing of a buffer is completed) unless

a form feed (FF), new line (NL), or carriage return (CR) was

the last character in the print order.

ON—a form feed will be executed automatically at the end of

the print order (when printing of a buffer is completed) unless

a form feed (FF) is the last character in the print order.

74 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPDS Menu

The following table describes the settings you can change from the IPDS Menu. An

asterisk (*) next to a value means it is the factory default. This menu appears only if

you have the IPDS SIMM installed.

Notes:

1. To select a new value, press the Enter key when the value is displayed in the

message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the value in the message

display area, indicating that it is now active.

2. Values specified in IPDS print jobs override IPDS Menu values set at the printer.

3. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

IPDS MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

PAGEPROT

AUTO*

Sets page protection:

AUTO—the printer uses the minimum amount of memory necessary to

print a page.

ON—the printer reserves enough memory to process an entire page

without compression before it prints the page. This can help in the

rare case where the printer compression scheme causes a loss of

quality in complex graphics. This setting is available only when the

printer has enough memory.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPDS MENU

ITEM

VALUE

nnnn

Description

DEF CD PAG

Specifies the default code page. The default value is code page 037.

037 US, Canada, Netherlands, Portugal

038 US English ASCII

260 Canadian French

273 Austrian/German

274 Belgium

276 Canadian French

277 Danish/Norwegian

278 Finnish/Swedish

280 Italian

281 Japanese

284 Spanish

285 UK English

286 Austrian/German (alternate)

287 Danish/Norwegian (Alternate)

288 Finnish/Swedish (Alternate)

290 Japanese/Katakana

297 French

420 Arabic

423 Greek

424 Hebrew

500 Belgium, Switzerland / International

870 Latin 2 Multilingual

871 Icelandic

875 Greek

880 Cyrillic

892 OCR - A

893 OCR - B

905 Turkish

1025 Cyrillic Multilingual

1026 Turkish

EMULATION

4028*

4324

Specifies the printer to emulate. Select 4324 only if you have the

appropriate level of PSF software installed. (Consult with your system

administrator.)

DEFAULT FGID

nnnnn

Specifies the default FGID (Font Typeface Global Identifier), which

identifies the default resident font the printer uses. The default value is

FGID 416, which specifies Courier 10 point as the default resident font. To

print a listing of all installed IPDS fonts, see “Printing a List of IPDS Fonts”

on page 39.

CPI

nn.n

Selects characters-per-inch (pitch) for the default font. Valid values are

5.0 to 30.0 in tenths of an inch. The default value is 10.

VPA CHK

ON*

OFF

Turns valid printable area checking on or off.

ON—the printer checks for pels that fall outside the intersection of the

logical and physical pages. If pels fall outside the area, the printer

reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Control

command setting requires error reporting.

OFF—The printer does not report pels outside the valid printable area.

76 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPDS MENU

ITEM

VALUE

nnn

Description

X-OFFSET

Sets the print offset in the X (horizontal) direction. nnn can be from -999

to 999. The default setting is 0 pels. Positive values move the starting

point for printing to the right of the physical point of origin. Negative

values move the starting point for printing to the left. The physical point of

origin is towards the top left corner of a portrait page. If you rotate the

page, the physical point of origin rotates as well.

Note: The X-OFFSET and Y-OFFSET options are intended to allow older

line printer print jobs to fit on a page where edge-to-edge printing is not

possible. Using X-OFFSET and Y-OFFSET is NOT recommended when

generating new applications, especially duplex applications.

Y-OFFSET

nnn

Sets the print offset in the Y (vertical) direction. nnn can be from -999 to

999. The default setting is 0 pels. Positive values move the starting point

for printing down from the physical point of origin. Negative values move

the starting point for printing up. The physical point of origin is towards the

top left corner of a portrait page. If you rotate the page, the physical point

of origin rotates as well.

Note: The X-OFFSET and Y-OFFSET options are intended to allow older

line printer print jobs to fit on a page where edge-to-edge printing is not

possible. Using X-OFFSET and Y-OFFSET is NOT recommended when

generating new applications, especially duplex applications.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPDS MENU

ITEM

VALUE

Description

PAGE

WHOLE*

COMP1

COMP2

Determines how data is positioned on the page.

WHOLE—IPDS whole page (default). The printer does not move or

compress the page. This is the preferred method; all page positioning

and formatting is done at the application level on the host. The

PRINT, COMP1, and COMP2 options may alter the appearance of the

page, or may not be compatible to predecessor products (for example,

3116, 3916), especially when combined with duplex and other IPDS

MENU page format adjustments such as X-OFFSET and Y-OFFSET.

PRINT, COMP1, and COMP2 are included to allow older line printer

jobs to fit on a page where edge-to-edge printing was not possible;

they are NOT recommended for use in generating new applications.

COMP1—COMP1 format uses PRINT page as a base, and then

compresses the spacing between text lines generated by the IPDS

Begin Line command. Its primary purpose is to compress Begin Line

text data into a page with unprintable borders.

COMP2—COMP2 format uses PRINT page as a base, and then adds

compression IPDS Begin Line command (see COMP1) and of the

following vertical text positioning commands: Absolute Move Baseline,

Relative Move Baseline, Draw B Axis Rule, Draw I Axis Rule.

Note: Alignment problems can occur if you select COMP1 or COMP2

and you print jobs that mix text with images, graphics, or bar codes.

Problems arise when text positioning commands are used to move

across text or into non-text (image, graphic, or bar-code) areas. Both

COMP1 and COMP2 reduce the line spacing of text only and have no

effect on non-text data. To minimize this problem, select COMP1,

because Begin Line commands are not normally used to move across

or into non-text areas. If, however, the application you want to

compress does not use Begin Line commands, you should select

COMP2.

PRINT—IPDS print page. If the page origin falls within the unprintable

area, the origin of the page is moved to the inside edge of the nearest

unprintable area border. If the origin violates the unprintable area on

two edges, it is moved to the nearest inside corner of the unprintable

area. If the origin violates only one edge unprintable area, then the

origin is adjusted to get out of only that area.

If a location adjustment is made, the printed page shifts in the

direction of the adjustment. There is no compression, so the

opposite-edge data may be pushed off the page.

Note: Any data placed in this unprintable area is lost. Also, PRINT

will not work on envelopes or media overlays (overlays that are part of

the base page, not the overlays included in the variable print data).

FONT SUB

OFF*

Turns font substitution on or off.

OFF—if a job requests a font that is not loaded on the printer, the port

generates an IPDS NACK message and the host holds the job.

ON—if a job requests a font that is not loaded on the printer, the

printer attempts to substitute another font.

78 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPDS MENU

ITEM

VALUE

OFF*

Description

EARLY COMPL

Turns early print completion on or off for IPDS jobs.

OFF—the printer waits until the job is physically complete to signal the

host that the job is complete.

ON—the printer signals the host that the job is complete as soon as

the IPDS data is formatted.

Setting EARLY COMPL=ON may improve print performance, but may also

degrade recovery and cause lost data for some printing problems, such as

jams.

IPDS PORT

COAX*

TRING

ETHER

Specifies the attachment you use for IPDS jobs.

Note: You can print IPDS from more than one port; setting this item,

therefore, does not restrict you from printing from multiple ports. Also, this

item may not appear on some printers.

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Machine Information Menu

Use the Machine Info Menu to display information about printer supply usage. The

following table describes the functions you can perform from the Machine Info Menu.

Note: If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please

read “Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

MACHINE INFO MENU

Description

ITEM

PAGE COUNT

Displays the number of pages the printer has printed. (The number of pages

printed is not reset when a toner or fuser cartridge is replaced.) To display the

page count, scroll to Page Count, then press the Enter key.

ERROR LOG

TONER CTR

Displays the error log. To display the Error Log, scroll to Error Log then press the

Value key to scroll through the list.

Displays the toner cartridge counter.

Note: IBM recommends resetting this counter whenever you change toner

cartridges. To reset the counter:

1. Scroll to TONER CTR, then press the Enter key to display the toner cartridge

page count.

2. Press the Value to reset the toner cartridge page counter to zero.

3. Press the Enter key to save the new setting. The new value is displayed the

next time you power off and then power on the printer.

FUSER CTR

Displays the fuser counter.

Note: IBM recommends resetting this counter whenever you change the fuser kit.

To reset the counter:

1. Scroll to FUSER CTR, then press the Enter key to display the toner cartridge

page count.

2. Press the Value to reset the toner cartridge page counter to zero.

3. Press the Enter key to save the new setting. The new value is displayed the

next time you power off and then power on the printer.

80 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Language Menu

Use the Language Menu to select the language that the printer uses to display

messages and menus on the operator panel. English is the factory default.

Notes:

1. To select a language, press the Enter key when the language value is displayed in

the message display area. An asterisk (*) appears next to the new value,

indicating that it is now active.

2. If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read

“Using the Operator Panel Keys” on page 30 and “Navigating Menus — Two

Examples” on page 31 before continuing.

ITEM

ENGLISH*

Description

Selects the language in which the printer displays operator panel messages and

menus.

DANISH

DUTCH

FINNISH

FRENCH

GERMAN

ITALIAN

Note: On the actual operator panel, the name of each language may be spelled

using its native spelling. Also, the order of the languages may be different than the

order displayed here.

KATAKANA

NORWEGIAN

PORTUGUESE

SPANISH

SWEDISH

Chapter 3. Navigating Through the Operator Panel Menus 81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

82 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes

This chapter describes how to:

Select print media

Load paper into the following:

–

Paper trays 1 and 2

2000-sheet input drawer - paper tray 3 (if installed)

Auxiliary tray

Envelope feeder (if installed)

Use the PAPER MENU to specify default trays, and paper sizes for your printer.

Important

Values you select from the printer driver or from an application override default

values set at the printer operator panel. For example, if you select paper Tray 1

from the printer driver or application, the printer will use paper from paper Tray 1,

even if the default tray is set to paper Tray 2.

Selecting Paper and Other Printable Material

The following table shows the supported media types and weights for inputs and

outputs on the printer. For each media type, the table also indicates if simplex

(single-sided print) or duplex (two-sided print) is supported by the particular input tray.

By using the information in this table, paper handling restrictions, such as envelopes

which cannot be printed in duplex, can be determined.

Network Administrator Tip

Before purchasing large quantities of paper, print some sample pages to ensure the

paper does not cause paper jams and that the paper provides acceptable print

quality. This applies also to envelopes and other media.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5. Supported Media Types and Sizes

Media Type

and Size

Input

Output

Finisher

Tray 1

Tray 2 and

Tray 3

Auxiliary Tray

Envelope

Feeder

Main, Face-Up,

Finisher

Face-Up (no

offset or

Face-Down

(can offset or

staple)

Letter

8.5 x 11in

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

yes (with offset

or staple)

yes

Legal

8.5 x 14in

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

yes (with offset

or staple)

Folio

8.5 x 13in

simplex

yes

11x17

11 x 17in

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

yes (with offset

or staple)

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

yes (with offset

or staple)

297 x 420mm

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

yes (with offset

or staple)

210 x 297mm

simplex or

duplex

yes

148.5 x 210mm

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

simplex or

duplex

yes (with offset

or staple)

257 x 364mm

B5-JIS

182 x 257mm

simplex or

duplex

yes

B5-ISO (paper)

176 x 250mm

simplex

Executive

7.25 x 10.5in

simplex or

duplex

Statement

5.5 x 8.5in

simplex

Transparencies

Labels

simplex

yes

Com10

Business

Envelope

4.125 x 9.5in

simplex

yes

B5-ISO

(envelope)

176 x 250mm

C5 Envelope

162 x 229mm

simplex

yes

DL Envelope

110 x 220mm

Monarch

Envelope

3.875 x 7.5in

simplex

yes

JPOSTD

150 x 200mm

Notes:

Yes is supported; no is not supported which means that the input or output tray cannot support the specified paper size.

Tray 3 is the optional 2000-sheet input drawer.

Main is the face-down tray.

Offset is supported only by the optional 2000-sheet finisher.

Finisher is the optional 2000-sheet finisher, which includes the upper, middle, and lower bins.

Trays 1, 2, and 3 support paper weights for copier and recycled at 16 to 28 pounds (60 to 105 grams/meterò).

Auxiliary tray supports paper weights for copier and recycled at 16 to 28 pounds (64 to 128 grams/meterò) and card stock up to 110 pound (199

grams/meterò). When printing two sides, duplex, limit the paper weight to 16 to 28 pounds (60 to 105 grams/metersò).

Envelope feeder and auxiliary tray support envelope weight at 21 to 28 pounds (80 to 105 grams/meterò). Envelope weight should not exceed 28

pounds (105 grams/meterò).

84 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting Paper from Printer Drivers and Datastreams

The printer determines the paper size in each paper tray by using a feature called

autosensing.

When you submit a print job, the printer driver or datastream, such as PostScript,

specifies a paper size. The printer, using autosensing, selects the paper tray with the

correct paper size to match the paper size specified in the print job.

For example, if letter size paper is loaded in paper tray 1 and legal size paper is loaded

into paper tray 2, and your print job specifies legal, the printer selects paper from tray

2. You do not need to specify tray 2 from your printer driver or datastream.

Selecting Output as Face Up or Face Down

You can select from the operator panel or printer driver to send your print job output

either face up (printed side up) or face down (printed side down) to an output bin or

tray.

ABC

C A B

Face up

Face down

Defining the Printable Area

The printable area is defined as the area where print can be placed on a sheet of

paper. For all paper sizes, the printable area cannot exceed the following margins:

Table 6. Printable Area and Margins

Orientation

Top

Margin (in.)

0.12

Margin (mm)

3.0

4.0

4.5

Bottom

Left

0.12

0.16

Right

0.18

The following illustration shows the print margins. (Paper area where you can print is

shaded).

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0.12 in / 3.0 mm

c9pu292

0.16 in / 4.0 mm

0.18 in / 4.5 mm

Important

When printing from an application, make sure you do not exceed the margins listed

above. For example, you must make sure that you set, from your application, the

left margin to be more than 0.16 inches or 4.0 mm from the left side of the paper.

86 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing Paper

Here are some tips for storing paper (includes envelopes, transparencies, and other

media):

Store unused paper in its wrapping to protect paper from humidity.

Store paper in a cabinet; avoid storing paper directly on the floor as there is more

humidity nearer the floor.

Store paper on a flat surface to avoid curling.

Store paper at the same temperature and humidity levels as the roomr where the

printer is located for at least 24 hours before using the paper. (Paper may curl or

wrinkle due to the change in temperature or humidity.)

Make sure paper is not stored in direct sunlight. (This can bleach the paper and

dry the paper out.)

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Loading Paper

This section describes how to load paper and envelopes into:

Paper Trays 1 and 2

2000-sheet paper input drawer - Paper Tray 3 (if installed)

Auxiliary tray

Envelope feeder (if installed)

Loading Letterhead and Prepunched Paper

Your printer can print on both prepunched and preprinted paper (for example, paper

with letterhead or pre-printed numbers). Use the following guidelines to load the paper:

Type of Printing

Tray

Orientation

One-sided

Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3

Place pre-printed side down, with the top of

the printed paper toward the front of the

paper tray.

If using prepunched paper, place the punched

side toward the left side of the paper tray.

Auxiliary tray

Place pre-printed side up, with the top of the

printed paper toward the back of the auxiliary

tray

If using prepunched paper, place the punched

side toward the left side of the auxiliary tray.

Two-sided printing (if

optional duplex unit is

installed)

Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3

Place pre-printed side up, with the top of the

printed paper toward the back of the printer.

If using prepunched paper, place the punched

side toward the left side of the paper tray.

Auxiliary tray

Place pre-printed side down, with the top of

the printed paper toward the front of the tray.

If using prepunched paper, place the punched

side toward the left side of the auxiliary tray.

Loading Paper into Trays 1 and 2

You can load the following paper sizes into the paper trays:

Tray

Paper

Tray 1

Tray 2

A4, B4, legal, and letter

A3, A4, B3, B4, B5, ledger, legal, and letter.

Follow these steps to load paper into either paper tray:

Note: Instructions for loading paper are also provided in the paper drawer for your

convenience.

88 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Remove paper tray from the printer by squeezing the handle (1) and pulling tray

out (2) until it stops. Do not remove the tray from the printer.

2. Adjust the paper guides by turning the dial to the right to unlock the front paper

size guide (1). Match the arrow to the correct paper size (2) and then lock the dial

by turning the dial to the left.

3. Lift the left paper size guide up and remove from paper tray. Align the tip of the

paper size guide with the correct paper size marker (1) and then return the paper

size guide by placing it down into the paper tray (2).

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. After the guides are adjusted to the correct paper size, insert the paper along those

guides. Make sure the guides are aligned with the correct paper size labels. Paper

is loaded as shown below:

5. Make sure the paper does not exceed the paper limit mark (1). Also check to see

that the paper is under the white retaining clips (2) located on the front and back of

the paper tray.

6. Close the paper tray by sliding the paper tray forward. If you removed the paper

tray completely from the printer, line up the yellow arrow on the paper tray to the

yellow arrow on the printer and slide the paper tray forward.

90 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Place labels, supplied with printer, on the paper size indicator.

8. Insert the paper size indicator in the slot located in the front of the paper tray.

Make sure the label matches the paper in the paper tray.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Loading Paper into 2000-Sheet Input Drawer - Tray 3

The 2000-sheet input drawer can hold up to 2000 sheets of paper. (See Figure 2 on

page 4 for location.)

Follow these steps:

Note: Instructions for loading paper are also provided on the paper drawer for your

convenience.

1. Grasp the handle, pull the handle up, and pull the drawer towards you.

2. Lift the pin to unlock the front paper guide. Lift up the front paper guide and set

aside.

3. Move the front paper guide to the desired paper size location. The top and bottom

slots are labeled with paper sizes. For instance, if you want to load letter size

paper, set the front paper guide in the top and bottom slots labeled LTR 11X17.

4. Make sure the front paper guide is set into the same slots on both the top and

bottom. Once the front paper guide is set in place, push down on the locking pin to

ensure the front paper guide is held in place.

92 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Lift the pin to unlock the rear paper guide. Lift up the rear paper guide and set

aside.

6. Move the rear paper guide to the desired paper size location. The top and bottom

slots are labeled with paper sizes. For instance, if you want to load legal size

paper, set the front paper guide in the top and bottom slots labeled LGL.

7. Make sure the rear paper guide is set into the same slots on both the top and

bottom. Once the rear paper guide is set in place, push down on the locking pin to

ensure the rear paper guide is held in place.

8. Lift the pin to unlock the left paper guide. Lift up the left paper guide and set aside.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Move the left paper guide to the desired paper size location. The top and bottom

slots are labeled with paper sizes. For instance, if you want to load legal size

paper, set the left paper guide in the top and bottom slots labeled LGL

10. Make sure the left paper guide is set into the same slots on both the top and

bottom. Once the left paper guide is set in place, push down on the locking pin to

ensure the left paper guide is held in place.

11. For larger size paper, such as A3, 11X17, B4, and Legal, the paper slots are

located as shown below and are labeled from left to right: A3, 11X17, B4, and

LGL.

12. Load paper with print side down into the drawer. Make sure the paper does not

exceed the paper limit mark.

94 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. Close the 2000-sheet input drawer.

14. Place labels, supplied with the printer, on the paper size indicator.

15. On the front of the 2000-sheet input drawer, you can insert a paper size indicator

to indicate what type of paper is loaded in the drawer. Insert the paper size

indicator into the slot and push the paper size indicator into place.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important

Do not open or close the drawer while the printer is printing a job. This can cause

vibrations which may affect print quality.

Also, when you use smaller size paper, such as letter, there will be empty space

within the drawer. Do not use the drawer to store paper or other items in the empty

space. This can cause paper jams.

Loading Paper into Auxiliary Tray

1. Use labels that are on full sheets with no spaces or bent corners. The following

illustration shows a label sheet with missing labels and a label sheet with bent

corners. Using labels on partial sheets or labels with bent corners can cause the

labels to become detached inside the printer.

2. Paper must be loaded into the auxiliary tray with either the short edge or long edge

of the paper loaded first, as described below:

a. Load all envelopes and paper (except A4 and Letter) with the short edge first

as shown below:

96 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Short

edge

c9pu290

b. Load A4 and Letter size paper with the long edge first, as shown below:

Long

edge

c9pu289

3. Grasp the handle and pull the auxiliary tray (1) towards you. (To locate the tray,

see Figure 4 on page 7.)

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Gently pull out the auxiliary extension tray (1) until it latches.

Note: Even though the auxiliary extension tray is used to support larger size

paper, you will still want to make sure the tray is pulled out and latched in place.

(This helps avoid problems feeding paper to the printer.)

5. If you are printing larger size paper, such as 11X17, pull out the other extension

tray (1).

98 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the paper. Correct paper positions are labeled on

the tray. For instance, if you are loading letter size transparencies, set the paper

guides to the position labeled LTR. Load paper (2) as shown below:

7. Make sure paper does not exceed the paper marks that are located on the paper

guides.

8. When loading envelopes, adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the envelopes. Load the

envelopes (2) as shown below:

Loading Envelopes into Envelope Feeder

Do not use envelopes as shown below as envelopes with windows, ties, and

self-adhesive strips can cause paper jams.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Follow these steps:

1. Lift the envelope pressure plate (1) all the way up.

2. Gently pull out the envelope feeder extension tray (2) until it latches into place.

Note: Even though the envelope feeder extension tray is used to support larger

size envelopes, you will still want to make sure the tray is pulled out and latched in

place. (This helps avoid problems feeding envelopes to the printer.)

3. Press the left guide button and slide it all the way to the left to move both guides.

(This enables you to place envelopes between the guides; you will adjust the

guides later to match the envelope size.)

100 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Place the envelopes, no more than 100, on a clean, flat surface, and press down

on the corners to flatten the corners.

5. Fan all corners to remove any stiffness and make sure to straighten any curled

corner.

6. Tap the envelopes on a flat surface to align the envelopes as shown below: (This

helps avoid problems feeding envelopes to the printer.)

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Load envelopes with address side up and the top of the envelope flush against the

right side of the envelope feeder as shown below. (To reduce the possibility of

paper jams, try to load the envelopes so that the envelopes are slightly angled

starting from the bottom. The bottom envelope should be slightly further in than the

top envelope.)

8. Press the left guide button and slide all the way to the right until the guides slightly

touch the sides of the envelopes. Make sure the guides do not cause the

envelopes to bend as this could cause a paper jam.

102 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Make sure the envelopes are all the way forward (1) and lower the envelope

pressure plate (2) to keep the envelopes in place. Also, make sure the envelopes

do not exceed the limit mark.

10. Make sure the total number of envelopes does not exceed 100. Even if you can

stack more than 100 envelopes under the limit mark, which is the triangle shape

shown in the following illustration, you should not stack more than 100 envelopes

at a time in the envelope feeder.

When you are ready to print, select the envelope feeder value from the operator panel

menu. See “Using the Paper Menu” on page 104 for more information.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Paper Menu

This section describes some of the basic tasks you can perform using the Paper Menu,

including how to:

Select default input trays and output bins.

Define the paper size used by the auxiliary tray and envelope tray

Turn tray switching on and off

For complete information about items in the Paper Menu, see “Paper Menu” on

page 48.

Selecting The Default Input Tray

Situation: You want to change the default input tray for your printer.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see SOURCE=source* in the display, where source is

the current default.

4. Press the Value key until you see the input you want to use as the default.

Note: The values displayed depend on the options installed in the printer. If the

2000-sheet input drawer is installed, it appears as TRAY3 and if the envelope

feeder is installed, it appears as ENVELOPE.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new tray. An asterisk appears next to the value,

showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Note: Printer driver values specified by a user override defaults set at the printer. For

example, if a user selects TRAY3, then the printer will use TRAY3, even if the default

tray is set to another paper tray, such as TRAY1.

Selecting The Default Output Bin

Situation: You have installed the face-up output bin and you want to make it the

default bin.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see OUTPUT=output* in the display, where output is

the current default.

4. Press the Value key until you see OUTPUT=FACE-UP. (The face-up tray must be

installed for this value to appear.)

104 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new bin. An asterisk appears next to the value,

showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Defining the Auxiliary Tray Paper Size

Situation: You want to define a new paper size for the auxiliary tray.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see AUXSIZE=size* in the display, where size is the

current default.

4. Press the Value key until you see the new value you want.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new size. An asterisk appears next to the value,

showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Defining the Envelope Feeder Envelope Size

Situation: You want to define a new envelope size for the optional envelope feeder.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see ENVSIZE=size* in the display, where size is the

current default.

Note: This value appears only if the optional envelope feeder is installed.

4. Press the Value key until you see the new value you want.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new size. An asterisk appears next to the value,

showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turning Tray Switching On or Off

Situation: You want to turn tray switching on or off. Tray switching specifies whether

or not to switch to another paper tray if the current one is empty. When switching is

ON (the default value) the printer automatically looks in other trays for the right size of

paper if the current tray does not contain the paper size specified by the job. OFF

specifies no switching.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see TRAY SWITCH=ON* or TRAY SWITCH=OFF in

the display.

4. Press the Value key until you see the new value you want.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new setting. An asterisk appears next to the

value, showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Turning Auxiliary Tray Manual Feeding On or Off

Situation: You want to turn manual feeding for the auxiliary tray on or off. When

manual feeding is OFF (the default) paper feeding from the auxiliary tray is automatic.

When manual feeding is ON, paper feeding is manual, one sheet at a time. Messages

on the operator panel prompt you to insert each sheet.

Note: When MANUAL is set to ON, you can only print from the Auxiliary Tray. IBM

suggests you keep the default value of MANUAL=OFF and when you need to print from

the Auxiliary Tray, you select the Auxiliary Tray from your printer driver or datastream.

Action:

1. Press the Online key until you see OFFLINE in the display.

2. Press the Menu key until you see PAPER MENU in the display.

3. Press the Item key until you see MANUAL=ON* or MANUAL=OFF in the display.

4. Press the Value key until you see the new value you want.

5. Press the Enter key to select the new setting. An asterisk appears next to the

value, showing that it is active.

6. To restore the printer to READY status, press the Online key.

Stapling Print Jobs

Situation: You want to staple your print jobs. To staple print jobs, the 2000-sheet

finisher must be installed and you must have a current printer driver installed. (The

stapling function is available only from the printer driver, you cannot select stapling from

the operator panel.)

Action:

106 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. From the print driver, specify how you want your print job stapled.

2. Review the following illustration to determine where you want your print job stapled.

For instance, if you are printing a landscape document, you can have your

document stapled in the top right corner or stapled in the top center of the

document. If you choose right corner, one staple is stapled, if you choose top

center, then two staples will be stapled.

Portrait

Landscape

Long

edge

Long

edge

A A

Short

edge

Short

edge

A A

c9pu291

Chapter 4. Loading Paper and Envelopes 107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

108 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams

This chapter describes how to clear paper jams from different parts of the printer.

When the printer detects a jam, it displays a message. However, when paper gets

jammed in one area of the paper path, the paper is often jammed in other areas.

Therefore it is a good idea to check the entire paper path whenever you see a paper

jam message.

Figure 12, shows the paper path with the optional duplex feature installed. The

standard paper path is indicated by white arrows, the duplex paper path is indicated by

black arrows.

Figure 12. Standard and Duplex Paper Path

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where the paper curves upward, paper jams may occur. If there is a paper jam, the

printer displays an error message. The error message indicates which cover to open.

The following are covers you open to remove paper jams:

1. Top cover

Open to remove paper jams from the fuser area and paper jams that you cannot

reach from the right cover.

2. Right cover

Open to remove paper jams from Tray 1 and 2.

3. Front cover

Open to remove paper jams and also to remove paper jams from the duplex unit.

4. Left cover

Open to remove paper jams and also to remove paper jams from the duplex unit.

Figure 13, shows the paper path with the optional envelope feeder feature installed.

c9pu240

Figure 13. Standard and Envelope Feeder Paper Path

110 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where the paper curves upward, paper jams may occur. If there is a paper jam, the

printer displays an error message. The error message indicates which cover to open.

The following are covers you open to remove paper jams:

1. Top cover

Open to remove paper jams from the fuser area and paper jams that you cannot

reach from the right cover.

2. Envelope Feeder

Check for paper jams.

3. Right cover

Open to remove paper jams from Tray 1 and 2.

4. Front cover

Open to remove paper jams.

5. Left cover

Open to remove paper jams.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 14, shows the paper path with the optional 2000-sheet paper input drawer

installed. The 2000-sheet paper input drawer paper path is indicated by black arrows.

Figure 14. 2000-Sheet Paper Input Drawer Paper Path

112 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where the paper curves upward, paper jams may occur. If there is a paper jam, the

printer displays an error message. The error message indicates which cover to open.

The following are covers you open to remove paper jams:

1. Top cover

Open to remove paper jams from fuser area and paper jams that you cannot reach

from the right cover.

2. Right cover

Open to remove paper jams from Tray 1 and 2.

3. Paper pick-up cover

Open to remove paper jams from 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3).

4. Left cover

Open to remove paper jams and also to remove paper jams from the duplex unit.

Figure 15, shows the paper path with the optional 2000-sheet finisher installed. The

2000-sheet finisher paper path is indicated by black arrows.

c9pu301

Figure 15. 2000-Sheet Finisher Paper Path

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where the paper curves upward, paper jams may occur. If there is a paper jam, the

printer displays an error message. The error message indicates which cover to open.

The following are covers you open to remove paper jams:

1. Lower paper access cover (input cover)

Open to remove paper jams between the printer and the 2000-sheet finisher.

2. Stapler cover

Open to remove stapler jams.

3. Output upper, middle, and lower bins

Check for paper jams.

4. Upper paper access cover (output cover)

Open to remove paper jams between the printer and the 2000-sheet finisher and

paper jams that occurred in the stapling process.

114 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locating Paper Jams

The following is a list of paper jam error messages. Use this list to determine where

paper jams have occured and what task to perform to clear the paper jam:

Message Number

Task

A staple is jammed in the stapler unit. Go to “Clearing

Staple Jams” on page 136.

Paper has jammed inside the printer. The printer cannot

display where the paper jam is. Start by opening the top

cover, then the right cover, then the left cover, and then

the front cover.

21.1 and 22.1

Paper has jammed near either tray 1 or tray 2. Go to

“Removing Paper Jams from Paper Trays 1 and 2” on

page 121.

23.1, 23.2, and 23.3.

24.1 and 24.2

Paper has jammed near the fuser or in the fuser area.

Go to “Removing Paper Jams from the Fuser Area” on

page 116.

Paper has jammed near the face-down tray. Go to

“Removing Paper Jams from the Face-Up Tray” on

page 130 and “Removing Paper Jams from the

Face-Down Tray” on page 131.

25.1, 25.2, 26.1, and 26.2

Paper has jammed near the front cover or if the duplex

unit is installed, in the duplex unit. Go to “Removing

Paper Jams from the Duplex Unit” on page 127.

Paper has jammed near the auxiliary tray because the

wrong size paper was loaded into the auxiliary tray. Go

to “Removing Paper Jams from the Auxiliary Tray” on

page 124.

33.1, 33.2, and 33.3

34.1, 34.2, and 34.3

35.1, 35.2, 35.3, and 35.4

Paper has jammed inside the 2000-Sheet Input Drawer

(Tray 3) while feeding paper to the printer. Go to

“Removing Paper Jams from 2000-Sheet Input Drawer -

Tray 3” on page 123.

Paper has jammed near the paper pickup cover while

exiting 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3). Go to

“Removing Paper Jams from 2000-Sheet Input Drawer -

Tray 3” on page 123.

Paper has jammed between the 2000-sheet finisher and

the printer near the paper feed or paper transfer area.

Go to “Removing Paper Jams from 2000-Sheet Input

Drawer - Tray 3” on page 123 and “Removing Paper

Jams from the Transfer Area” on page 132.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

36.1, 36.2, 36.3, and 36.4

37.1, 37.2, 37.3, and 37.4

38.1, 38.2, 38.3, and 38.4

Paper has jammed within the 2000-sheet finisher near

the paper reversing area. Go to “Removing Paper Jams

from the Reversing Area” on page 133.

Paper has jammed as paper was being stacked in the

output bins. Go to “Removing Paper Jams from the

Paper Delivery Area” on page 135.

Paper has jammed as paper was being stapled. Go to

“Removing Paper Jams from the Paper Delivery Area”

on page 135.

Important

Occasionally, after you open a printer cover to remove a paper jam and then close

the cover, the printer may not return to the Ready state. If this occurs, check for

another paper jam. If no other paper jam is found, then simply open any printer

cover and then close the printer cover. This should return the printer to the Ready

state.

Removing Paper Jams from the Fuser Area

Follow these steps:

1. Turn printer power off and unplug printer.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

116 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Open the left printer cover. (To locate the left printer cover, see Figure 5 on

page 9.) You may want to remove the face-up tray for easier access.

CAUTION:

Do not touch the fuser (labeled) in the printer. It can be extremely hot.

Always wait at least 40 minutes for the fuser to cool down.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Remove paper from these areas by gently pulling the paper in the direction of the

arrows:

118 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. If paper is still jammed in the fuser area, press down the green tab (as shown in

the illustration) to open the door and pull the paper straight out. Release the green

tab to close the door.

5. Make sure there is no debris or paper left in the fuser area.

6. Close the left printer cover.

7. Plug in power cord and turn printer power on.

Removing Paper Jams from the Imaging Area

1. Turn printer power off and unplug power cord.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Open the top printer cover. (To locate the left printer cover, see Figure 4 on

page 7.)

CAUTION:

Do not touch the fuser (labeled) in the printer. It can be extremely hot.

Always wait at least 40 minutes for the fuser to cool down.

3. Remove the toner cartridge. Place the cartridge in a protective bag to avoid direct

contact with sunlight or room light.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. If you can see the paper edge, hold the green handle (the green handle is labeled

2) and open the transfer guide lock tray (1) and then roll the paper (2) and remove.

There may be some unused toner on the paper.

5. If you cannot see the paper edge, hold the green handle (1) (the green handle is

labeled 2) and open the transfer guide lock tray (2).

Note: Make sure you do not lift up the transfer guide lock tray (2) beyond its

upright position as this could damage the printer.

6. Lift up transfer guide lock tray and remove paper.

7. Release the green lever (green lever is labeled 3).

8. Close the transfer guide lock tray.

9. Replace the toner cartridge.

10. Close the top cover.

11. Plug in power cord and turn printer power on.

120 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing Paper Jams from Paper Trays 1 and 2

Follow these steps:

1. If the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3) is installed, lower the paper pick up cover

(1).

2. Open the right cover (2). (To locate the right cover, see Figure 4 on page 7).

3. If paper jam is from Tray 1, pull the green lever down to open the tension plate and

then remove the paper. To avoid tearing the paper, make sure you open the

tension plate before removing the paper.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. If paper jam is from Tray 2, remove paper as shown below:

5. Close the right cover (and the pick up cover).

6. If you do not find a paper jam in the above steps, check paper Trays 1 and 2 to

make sure there is no wrinkled or unusable paper in the trays.

122 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing Paper Jams from 2000-Sheet Input Drawer - Tray 3

Follow these steps:

1. If the 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3) is installed, lower the paper pick up cover.

(To locate the pick up cover, see Figure 4 on page 7).

2. Remove paper from the paper pick up cover by lifting the metal frame (metal frame

has a green label on it) and pulling the paper out. (Also check above the metal

frame.)

3. Close the paper pick up cover.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. If you do not find a paper jam in the above steps, check the 2000-sheet input

drawer (Paper Tray 3) to make sure there is no wrinkled or unusable paper in the

tray.

Removing Paper Jams from the Auxiliary Tray

Follow these steps:

1. Try to remove paper from the auxiliary tray by pulling the paper towards you. Most

paper jams can be removed this way.

2. If the paper cannot be removed easily from the auxiliary tray, you will need to

remove the paper by opening the top cover and removing the toner cartridge as

described in “Removing Paper Jams from the Imaging Area” on page 119.

Removing Paper Jams from the Envelope Feeder

Follow these steps:

1. Turn printer power off.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Remove envelopes from envelope feeder.

124 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Push in the envelope pressure plate (1) and lower the envelope press plate (2).

4. Remove the envelope feeder by slightly raising the end of the feeder (1) and pull

the envelope feeder out towards you (2).

5. Remove jammed envelope(s). If an envelope is torn, make sure no paper is left in

the envelope feeder rollers.

6. Replace the envelope feeder.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Turn printer power on.

Setting Fuser Envelope Levers

If envelopes are jamming in the fuser or near the fuser, the envelopes may be too thick

to pass through the fuser. You can set the fuser envelope levers to accommodate

thicker envelopes by performing these steps:

1. Turn printer power off.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Open the left printer cover. (To locate the left printer cover, see Figure 5 on

page 9.) You may want to remove the face-up tray for easier access.

c9pu227

CAUTION:

Do not touch the fuser (labeled) in the printer. It can be extremely hot.

Always wait at least 40 minutes for the fuser to cool down.

126 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Locate the fuser and the two fuser envelope levers (1), which are shown in the

down position.

4. Lift the envelope levers up (2).

c9pu235

5. Close the left printer cover.

6. Turn printer power on.

Note: Usually, you should leave the fuser envelope levers in the down position.

Placing the fuser envelope levers in the up position may cause poor print quality. If you

are printing a large quantity of envelopes, you may want to place the fuser envelope

levers in the up position, but return the fuser envelope levers to the down position when

finished printing.

Removing Paper Jams from the Duplex Unit

If the optional duplex unit is installed, follow these steps to remove a paper jam:

1. Press the top center area of the front cover, which is located on the front of the

printer directly underneath the operator panel, to open the cover. (To locate the

front cover, see Figure 4 on page 7.)

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Remove the paper jam by pulling paper towards you. Most paper jams can be

removed this way. If successful, close the front cover.

3. If you cannot remove the paper easily or without tearing the paper, you will need to

remove the duplex unit.

To remove the duplex unit, follow these steps:

1. Close the front cover.

2. Turn printer power off.

3. Unplug the printer.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

4. Open the left printer cover. (To locate the left printer cover, see Figure 5 on

page 9.)

CAUTION:

Do not touch the fuser (labeled) in the printer. It can be extremely hot.

Always wait at least 40 minutes for the fuser to cool down.

128 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Press the green tab (1) down to unlock the duplex unit.

6. Using both hands, pull the duplex unit out until the green plate (2) can be placed in

a vertical position. The green plate must be placed in a vertical position to access

paper jams.

7. Lift up the green plate (1) and gently pull the paper towards you (2). After you

remove the paper, return the green plate (1) to its original position.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. If the paper jam is inside the duplex unit, gently pull the paper straight up to

remove the paper.

9. After removing the paper, push the duplex unit back into place and close the left

printer cover.

10. Plug in the power cord.

11. Connect power cord to power source.

12. Turn printer power on.

Removing Paper Jams from the Face-Up Tray

Follow these steps:

1. Try to remove the paper jam from the face-up tray by pulling the paper towards

you. Most paper jams can be removed this way.

2. If the paper cannot be removed easily from the face-up tray, you will need to

remove the paper by following the steps listed in “Removing Paper Jams from the

Fuser Area” on page 116.

130 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing Paper Jams from the Face-Down Tray

Follow these steps:

1. Try to remove jammed paper from the face-down tray by pulling the jammed paper

towards you. Most paper jams can be removed this way.

2. If the paper cannot be removed easily from the face-down tray, you will need to

remove the paper by following the steps listed in “Removing Paper Jams from the

Fuser Area” on page 116.

3. Also check to see if the paper full indicator can move freely and is not obstructed

as this can cause a output bin full error message.

Removing Paper Jams from the 2000-Sheet Finisher

The 2000-sheet finisher paper jams may occur in several areas. Locate the correct area

and perform the appropriate steps:

Removing Paper Jams from the Paper Feed Area

1. Turn power off to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

2. Unplug power cables from both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

3. Pull the 2000-sheet finisher away from printer to be able to reach the upper paper

access cover. (See Figure 3 on page 5 to locate covers.)

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Remove jammed paper. (If paper is difficult to remove, go to “Removing Paper

Jams from the Transfer Area.”)

5. Plug power cables to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

6. Turn power on for both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

Removing Paper Jams from the Transfer Area

1. Turn power off to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

2. Unplug power cables from both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

3. Pull the 2000-sheet finisher away from printer to be able to reach the lower paper

access cover. (See Figure 3 on page 5 to locate covers.)

132 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Open the lower paper access cover.

5. Remove jammed paper.

6. Plug power cables to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

7. Turn power on for both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

Removing Paper Jams from the Reversing Area

1. Turn power off to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

2. Unplug power cables from both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Pull the 2000-sheet finisher away from printer to be able to reach the lower paper

access cover. (See Figure 3 on page 5 to locate covers.)

4. Open the upper paper access cover.

5. Remove jammed paper as shown below:

6. If paper is jammed in the face-up tray, lift the paper guide (1), and remove the

paper (2). Lower the paper guide back into place.

134 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. If paper is jammed by the face-down tray, lift the paper guide (1), and remove the

paper (2). Lower the paper guide back into place.

8. Plug power cables to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

9. Turn power on for both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

Removing Paper Jams from the Paper Delivery Area

1. If paper jam is visible in output bins, remove paper as shown below. If the paper

jam is difficult to remove, try slightly lifting up the output tray and then remove the

paper jam.

2. If paper jam is not visible in output bins, open upper paper access cover (top

cover) and check for paper jam.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu211

Clearing Staple Jams

1. Turn power off to both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

2. Unplug power cables from both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

3. Open the stapler cover. (See Figure 3 on page 5 to locate the stapler cover.)

4. Inside the stapler cover are instructions for removing staple jams; review these

instructions. The instructions are located on the stapler cover as shown below:

•CTHRINEIDGPCGLAEAR

•CTOREUEMCMEHPNELTADES CAR

•UATORASNWEECHSELN DER

•TURCEEHMOPLAZD DEL CAR

5. Pull the stapler unit down to access the staple cartridge.

136 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Hold down the green lever (1) and lift the staple jam release plate (2). If the green

lever is not held down, the staple jam release cover cannot be lifted up.

7. Using a pointed object, remove the jammed staple(s). Do not try to remove

jammed staples with your fingers, use a pointed object.

8. Push the staple jam release plate back down until the plate locks into place.

9. Return the stapler unit to the original position and close the stapler cover.

10. Plug power cables in and turn power on for both 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

Chapter 5. Clearing Paper Jams 137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Printer

This chapter describes how to:

Change the toner cartridge

Clean the printer.

Note: Routine care and maintenance of the printer is the customer's responsibility.

Ordering and Replacing Supplies

It is the customer's responsibility to order supplies for the Network Printer 24 and 24PS.

To assure best print quality and performance, use IBM supplies.

Printing supplies can be ordered through your IBM authorized printer or printer supplies

reseller. Part numbers for supplies are listed in “Ordering Supplies” on page 19. If you

have no reseller, you can order from IBM Printer Supplies in the U.S. or Canada by

calling 1-888-IBM-PRINT (1-888-426-7746).

In other countries, contact your point of purchase for information about where to order

supplies or you can call IBM Supplies Fulfillment Operations at the following numbers:

Denmark: 800 15534

Finland: 08001 13110

France: 0590 5871

Italy: 1678 78349

Germany: 0130 818 005

Netherlands: 043-350 2756

Spain 900 983131

Sweden: 0207 94270

United Kingdom: 08009 68679

You can also call IBM Supplies Fulfillment Operations at 31-43-350 2756.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the Toner Cartridge

A toner cartridge can print approximately 15,000 pages of letter-size paper, containing

text or graphics that cover 5% of the page. The TonerMiser feature, which is ECONO

setting in CONFIG menu, can provide double the page yield, depending upon the type

of printing.

The page-per-cartridge average decreases if you routinely print text or graphics that

cover more than 5% of the page.

When the toner cartridge is low or empty, the 02 TONER LOW message appears in the

display.

To display the number of pages printed using the current toner cartridge, select TONER

CTR on the Machine Info Menu (see “Machine Information Menu” on page 80). Note

that the counter is accurate only if it was reset when the current cartridge was installed.

Important

Only use a toner cartridge, part number 63H5721, that is designed specifically for

the Network Printer 24 and 24PS. See “Ordering Supplies” on page 19, for

information on ordering toner cartridges. Check the toner package for instructions

on how to return empty toner cartridges to IBM.

The toner cartridge contains a photosensitive drum and toner. Follow these steps to

change a toner cartridge:

1. Unplug power cord and turn printer power off.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Open the top printer cover. (To locate the top cover, see Figure 4 on page 7.)

3. Remove the empty toner cartridge as shown below:

140 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. If there is excess toner near the registration roller area. clean that area. See

“Cleaning the Registration Roller Area” on page 145.

5. Remove the new toner cartridge from its shipping box.

6. Open one end of the protective bag and remove the toner cartridge.

Important

Follow these rules when handling toner cartridges:

1. Avoid exposing the toner cartridge to direct sunlight

2. Do not open the drum shutter.

3. Do not leave the toner cartridge exposed outside the protective bag for

more than five minutes.

7. Gently rotate the toner cartridge five or six times back and forth (not up or down)

as shown below to evenly distribute the toner. This helps ensure that toner is

spread evenly and helps prevent toner smears.

8. Lift the white protective tape (1) on the front of the toner cartridge and pull it

around the orange label. Next, gently pull off the black sheet (2).

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Printer 141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Do not pull the ring up or down as shown below as the tape may snap off.

10. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface and locate the orange ring at the end of

the toner cartridge. Pull the orange ring straight out to remove the toner seal.

11. Grip the toner cartridge with both hands and slide the toner cartridge into the

printer as shown. Make sure the arrow on the toner cartridge is facing up and

pointing toward the printer when inserting the toner cartridge.

142 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. Gently tug the toner cartridge to make sure the toner cartridge is locked in place.

13. Close the top cover.

14. Plug in power cord and turn printer power on.

15. Reset the toner counter. At the operator panel, do these steps:

a. Press ONLINE

b. Select MACHINE INFO

c. Select TONER CTR

d. Press the ENTER key

e. Press VALUE key. This resets the counter to zero.

f. Press the ENTER key to save the new setting. The new setting is displayed

the next time you power off and then power on the machine.

g. You may want to print the printer configuration page to make sure toner

cartridge is working correctly. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32.

Cleaning the Printer

Use a soft, lint-free cloth to clean the outside covers of the printer.

Attention: Do not use abrasive cleaners on the printer covers. Do not use detergent

solutions or other liquids on electronic components. Do not use cleaners that contain

ammonia.

Cleaning the Anti-Static Teeth

If you have a problem with toner being smeared on your paper, you can clean the

anti-static teeth.

1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

2. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge. (Place the toner cartridge in a

protective bag to avoid direct sunlight.)

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Printer 143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Remove the green cleaning brush (1) from the printer. (The green cleaning brush is

located underneath the top cover.)

4. Slide the brush back and forth a few times to clean the anti-static teeth. (The

anti-static teeth are located near the green handle labeled 2.) Avoid touching the

transfer charging roller (1) as this could cause poor print quality.

5. Replace the brush and the toner cartridge.

6. Close the top cover and plug the power cord back into the power outlet.

7. Plug in power cord and turn on the printer.

Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area

If you have a problem with toner being smeared on your paper, you can clean this

area:

1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

2. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge. (Place the toner cartridge in a

protective bag to avoid direct sunlight.)

3. Avoid touching the transfer charging roller (1) as this could cause poor print quality.

144 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Use a soft, clean cloth, to wipe off any toner residue and paper dust from the area

shown below:

5. Close the top cover and plug the power cord back into the power outlet.

6. Plug in power cord and turn on the printer.

Cleaning the Registration Roller Area

When you replace a toner cartridge, you usually clean this area. If you have a problem

with toner being smeared on your paper, cleaning this area may help:

1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

2. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge. (Place the toner cartridge in a

protective bag to avoid direct sunlight.)

3. Use a soft, clean cloth, to wipe off any toner residue and paper dust from the silver

metal strip (2). (The silver metal strip is located by the green handle labeled 2.)

Avoid touching the transfer charging roller (1) as this could cause poor print quality.

4. Close the top cover and plug the power cord back into the power outlet. Turn on

the printer.

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Printer 145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replacing a Staple Cartridge

The staple cartridge is ordered in packages of three cartridges with each cartridge

holding 2000 staples.

Follow these steps:

1. Turn printer and 2000-sheet finisher power off.

2. Unplug the printer and the 2000-sheet finisher power cords.

3. Open the stapler cover (1) to remove the empty staple cartrdige.

4. Remove the empty staple cartridge.

146 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Remove the staple retainer, which holds the staples in place during shipment, from

the new staple cartridge.

c9pu293

6. Load a new staple cartridge and push the stapler unit back to the original position.

7. Press the test button using a pointed object to place the staples in the ready

position. (This prepares the stapler to begin stapling. If you do not perform this test,

it may take several print jobs before the staples are placed in the proper position

for stapling.)

Chapter 6. Maintaining the Printer 147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. Close the stapler cover.

9. Plug the power cords back into the printer and 2000-sheet finisher and turn printer

and 2000-sheet finisher power back on.

Performing a Stapler Test

After you replace a staple cartridge, you should perform a stapler test from the

Operator Panel. Follow these steps:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Menu key to select TEST MENU.

3. Press the Item key to select STAPLE TEST.

4. Press the Enter key to start the stapler test. A test page is printed and stapled. If

the test page is not stapled, check the staple cartridge.

5. Press the Online key to make the printer online and ready to print the next print

job.

148 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options

This chapter describes how to install the paper stop and face-up tray and the following

options:

The DRAM and FLASH SIMMs and hard drive options (see page 154)

The network interface card(s) (see page 166)

The envelope feeder (see page 168)

The duplex option (see page 171)

The options controller card (see page 162)

The 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3) (see page 174)

The 2000-sheet finisher (see page 180)

Staple cartridge (see page 191)

The printer stand (see page 193).

To verify that options are installed correctly, print the Configuration Page. See

“Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Important

Whenever you install an option, make sure you are using the latest printer driver.

Updated printer drivers can be obtained from http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Handling Static Sensitive Devices

When you handle options such as the hard drive, and other computer components, take

these precautions:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around

you.

Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters and memory-module kits by

the edges. Never touch any exposed circuitry.

When you are installing a new option, touch the static-protective package

containing the option to the mounting bracket, which is metal and where the screws

are mounted, on the controller card for at least two seconds. This reduces static

electricity from the package and from your body.

When possible, remove the option and install it directly in the controller without

setting the option down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective

package that the option came in on a smooth, level surface and place the option

on it.

Do not place the option on the printer cover or other metal surface.

150 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the Paper Stopper

Follow these steps:

1. The paper stopper should already be installed. You need to adjust the paper

stopper to match the paper you are printing.

2. Lift up the paper stop (1).

3. Pull the paper stop (2) back and set at the indicator that matches the paper you

are printing such as LTR for letter.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the Face-Up Tray

Follow these steps:

1. Unpack the face-up tray.

2. Attach the left (1) and right (2) tray clips to the printer.

152 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locating Options on the Printer Controller Card

The following illustration shows the locations of the options you can install on the printer

controller card. Use this illustration as a guide for locating and installing options, such

as the hard drive. (To locate where the printer controller card on the printer, see

Figure 16 on page 154.)

1. Hard drive

2. Network Interface Cards, two cards shown installed.

3. Options Controller Card

4. DRAM SIMMS

5. FLASH SIMMS

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing SIMM and Hard Drive Options

Here are the locations on the printer controller card where the SIMMs and Hard Drive

options are installed:

Figure 16. Controller Card Locations for SIMMs and Hard Drive Options

1. Two NIC slots and one option controller card slot.

2. Flash and data stream SIMMs

Four total slots. The slots are filled as follows:

a. One slot can be filled with either 2 MB or 4 MB Flash Memory SIMM

b. Two slots can be filled with data stream SIMMs, which include Adobe

PostScript Level 2 and Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)

c. One slot is filled at the factory with a SIMM. This SIMM holds information used

by the printer for PCL.

3. DRAM SIMMs

Two slots are provided for installing DRAM SIMMs.

4. Hard drive

The hard drive can be mounted on the controller card.

Optional SIMMs include:

Dynamic random access memory (DRAM) SIMMs: 4MB, 8MB, 16MB, or 32MB. A

maximum of 64MB can be installed.

Flash memory SIMMs: Either 2MB or 4MB can be installed.

Data stream SIMMs:

–

Adobe PostScript Level 2

154 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)

Installing a SIMM

Important

Follow the instructions for handling static-sensitive devices described on page 150.

Use the following procedure to install a SIMM:

1. Turn printer power off and unplug power cord.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Remove any cables attached to the controller board.

3. At the back of the printer, loosen the thumb screws that fasten the controller board.

4. Remove the controller board by pulling controller board toward you.

5. Locate the correct socket for the type of SIMM you are installing. The SIMM

sockets are labeled FLASH and DRAM. (See Figure 16 on page 154 for

location.) Your optional SIMM works only if it is installed in the correct socket.

a. The DRAM SIMMs must be installed in either of the two sockets on the right

side of the controller card, which are labeled DRAM.

b. The IPDS SIMM, PostScript SIMM, and the flash memory SIMMs must be

installed in one of the four sockets on the left side of the controller card, which

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

are labeled FLASH. The position of the SIMM within the group of sockets

does not matter.

6. Align the SIMM with the socket.

7. Insert the SIMM at a 45 degree angle and move it into position in the socket.

8. Using your thumbs, press with even pressure on both ends of the SIMM until the

SIMM is firmly seated in the socket.

156 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Make sure the clips on either end of the socket snap into place to hold the SIMM.

If necessary, use your thumbs to move the clips upright into the grooves to lock the

SIMM in place.

10. Verify that the SIMM is correctly installed in the socket by looking at its position

from the sides of the controller card.

11. If you are also installing a hard drive, go to step 7 on page 159.

12. Place the controller card back into the printer.

13. At the back of the printer, tighten the thumb screws that fasten the controller card.

14. Connect cables to the controller board.

15. Connect the power cord to the back of the printer.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16. Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet.

17. Switch the printer power on.

18. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

Note: If the message display area shows solid rectangles, reseat the SIMM and

make sure the SIMM is in the correct slot. For instance, if installing a DRAM SIMM,

make sure the DRAM SIMM is seated in a slot labeled DRAM.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed an option print a configuration page.

The report will list the options if they have been correctly installed. See “Example 1

— Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Note: If the SIMM you installed does not appear on the printer configuration page,

make sure that it is correctly seated.

158 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing a Hard Drive

Important

Follow the instructions for handling static-sensitive devices described on page 150.

Use the following procedure to install a hard drive:

1. Power off the printer.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Unplug the printer from the wall outlet.

3. Remove the power cord from the back of the printer.

4. Remove any cables attached to the controller board.

5. At the back of the printer, loosen the thumb screws that fasten the controller board.

6. Remove the controller board by pulling controller board toward you.

7. Unpack the hard drive.

8. Position the hard drive with the four screws facing the four matching holes on the

controller card. (See Figure 16 on page 154 for location.)

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Push the hard drive firmly into the card and slide the hard drive slightly down and

toward the connector (1). The pins (2) on the hard drive should be firmly seated in

the connector (1).

10. If you are also installing memory or data stream SIMMs, go to step 5 on page 155.

11. Insert the controller card back into the printer.

160 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. At the back of the printer, tighten the screws that fasten the controller card.

13. Connect cables to the controller board.

14. Connect the power cord to the back of the printer.

15. Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet.

16. Switch the printer power on.

17. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

Note: If the message display area shows solid rectangles, reseat the card.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed a hard drive, print a configuration page.

The report will list the hard drive if it has been correctly installed. See “Example 1

— Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Note: If the hard drive does not appear, make sure that it is correctly seated.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the Options Controller Card

Important

Follow the instructions for handling static-sensitive devices described on page 150.

Use the following procedure to install the options controller card:

1. Turn printer power off and unplug printer power cable.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

2. Remove any cables attached to the controller board.

3. At the back of the printer, loosen the thumb screws that fasten the controller board.

4. Remove the controller board by pulling controller board toward you.

5. On the controller board, remove the screws (1) from the options controller

connector faceplate (2). This is necessary so that cables from the optional

2000-sheet input drawer or 2000-sheet finisher can be connected to the options

controller card.

162 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Unpack the options controller card.

7. Mount the options controller card on the controller card as follows:

a. Place the options controller card in position so that the connector (2) sits flush

with the opening.

b. Line up the options controller card so that the connector (2) and cable

connection (1) can be easily inserted into the controller board (2).

c. Tighten the screw (3) on the options controller board to firmly seat the options

controller card on the controller board.

c9pu047

8. If you have difficulty inserting the connector into controller board connector, you

may want to perform these steps:

a. Remove the options controller connector support (2).

b. Insert the connector support (2) into the controller board.

c. Line up the options controller card so that the connector (1) and cable

connection (3) can easily be inserted into the connector support (2) and the

controller board.

d. Insert the options controller card and then tighten the screw to firmly seat the

options controller card on the controller board.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Place the controller board back into the printer.

FLASH

DRAM

c9pu320

10. At the back of the printer, tighten the screws that fasten the controller board.

11. Connect the cables to the controller board.

12. Connect the power cord to the back of the printer.

13. Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet.

14. Switch the printer power on.

15. Attach communication cable between the 2000-sheet input drawer and the options

controller card.

16. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

164 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note: If the message display area shows solid rectangles, reseat the card. If the

message display area shows 28.1 OPT CONTROLLER ERROR, this message

indicates that the options controller card cannot communicate with the 2000-sheet

input drawer. Check the cable connection.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed the options controller card, print a

configuration page. The report will list the options controller card if the card was

installed correctly. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on

page 32.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the Network Interface Card

The printer attaches to networks and other system configurations through these optional

cards:

IBM Network Card for Ethernet (10BaseT/10Base2)

IBM Network Card for Token Ring

IBM Twinax SCS Interface Card

IBM Coax SCS Interface Card

If you have purchased an optional network interface card for your printer, install it using

the procedure in this section.

Network Administrator Tip

Review the documentation that arrived with your network interface card to configure

the printer and your computing environment correctly.

Installing a Network Interface Card

Network Administrator Tip

Follow the instructions for handling static-sensitive devices described on page 150.

If you are installing a Token Ring card, jumpers must be installed over certain pins

on the card. For instructions, see the IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and Token

Ring Configuration Guide, which is included with the card.

Use the following procedure to install a Network Interface card:

1. Unpack the network interface card.

2. Switch the printer power off.

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

3. Unplug the printer from the wall outlet.

4. Remove the power cord from the back of the printer.

5. Move to the back of the printer. Loosen and remove the screws (1) that hold the

slot cover. Remove the slot cover and store it for future use.

166 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Insert the card into the slot, aligning it with the two guides at the top and bottom of

the slot. Slide the card vertically into these guides, pushing slowly and firmly until

you can feel the card seat into the socket.

7. Tighten the thumbscrews.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Administrator Tip

Once the card is installed, you will need to configure the printer and its

computing environment. To do so, review the documentation that arrived with

the cards.

Installing the Envelope Feeder

The optional envelope feeder enables you to stack up to 100 envelopes in the feeder.

Figure 17 shows the key parts of the envelope feeder:

Figure 17. Key Envelope Feeder Parts and Locations

1. Envelope pressure plate

Helps keep envelopes stacked correctly for printing.

2. Extension tray

Holds larger size envelopes.

3. Envelope side guide

Adjusts to fit different size envelopes.

168 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Follow these steps:

1. Unpack the envelope feeder. Make sure all packing materials are removed.

2. Turn printer power off and unplug the printer.

3. Open the auxiliary tray. (To locate the auxiliary tray, see Figure 4 on page 7.)

4. Remove the envelope feeder slot cover by pulling the cover to the right (1) and

then removing the cover towards you (2). (You may want to save this cover if you

choose to remove the envelope feeder at a later time.)

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Align the envelope feeder with the printer as shown below:

6. Align the tabs (1) on the envelope feeder with the printer slots (2) by positioning

the envelope feeder at a slight angle. Once the envelope feeder is in position,

gently slide the envelope feeder into the printer until you hear a clicking sound

which means the envelope feeder is seated firmly in place.

7. Lift up the envelope pressure plate (1) and pull the extension tray (2) out.

170 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. Plug in printer power cord and turn printer power on.

9. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

Note: If message display area shows solid rectangles, remove the envelope

feeder and install again.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed an option print a configuration page.

The report will list the options if they have been correctly installed. See “Example 1

— Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Installing the Duplex Unit Option

The duplex unit enables you to print on both sides of paper (two-sided printing).

Follow these steps to install the duplex unit:

1. Turn printer power off and unplug printer power cable.

2. Open the left printer cover. (To locate the left printer cover, see Figure 5 on

page 9.)

3. Unpack the duplex unit and remove all packing material, which include spacers and

all tape. Follow the order as shown in the following illustration.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Align the duplex unit with the printer as shown below.

5. With both hands, grasp the outer edges of the duplex and insert the duplex unit

into the printer.

6. Push the duplex unit into place.

172 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Close the left printer cover.

8. Plug in the printer power cable and turn printer power on.

9. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed the duplex unit, print a configuration

page. The report will list the duplex unit if installed properly. See “Example 1 —

Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the 2000-Sheet Input Drawer (Tray 3) Option

The 2000-sheet input drawer enables you to increase paper capacity of the printer.

Figure 18. 2000-Sheet Input Drawer

Follow these steps to install the 2000-sheet input drawer:

1. Turn printer power off and unplug power cord.

2. Unpack the 2000-sheet input drawer. Inside the drawer you should find a caution

sheet, paper size card and label, and input/output (I/O) cable.

Note: A power cord is not supplied with 2000-sheet input drawer.

3. Open the paper pick-up cover and remove the two orange spacers. To remove the

orange spacers, pinch the spacer tab and then pull the spacer slightly up. The

spacers will come loose.

4. Remove any shipping tape in the drawer.

174 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Move the 2000-sheet input drawer to the location where you want to locate the

printer. Press down on the casters on the part labeled ON to lock the casters in

place. This prevents the printer from rolling.

CAUTION:

When moving the printer, keep in mind that the back of the printer is heavier

than the front.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION:

The printer weighs 106 lb (48 kg) and requires four people to carry the

printer. Do not attempt to carry the printer by yourself; otherwise injury may

result.

6. Line up the holes on the bottom of the printer with the pins on the 2000-sheet input

drawer.

176 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Locate the I/O cable that was shipped with the 2000-sheet input drawer.

8. The 2000-sheet input drawer has two I/O connections: an upper 15-hole and lower

14-hole port. The 15-hole port (1) is used to connect the 2000-sheet input drawer

to the options controller card (which is located on the controller card). The 14-hole

port (2) is used to connect the 2000-sheet finisher to the 2000-sheet input drawer.

9. The I/O cable has two connectors: 15-pin and 14-pin. The 15-hole connector is

plugged into the 2000-sheet finisher 15-pin port; the 14-pin connector is plugged

into the options controller card. Review the following illustration to determine the

difference between 15-pin and 14-pin connector. The cable connector labeled 15 is

15-pin connector; the cable connector labeled 14 is 14-pin connector.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. Connect the I/O 15-pin connector to the 15-pin connector. Turn both screws to

secure the I/O cable in place.

11. Connect the I/O 14-pin connector to the options controller card that is located next

to the parallel port on the controller card. Turn both screws to secure the I/O cable

in place.

12. Close the paper pick up cover. (To locate the paper pick up cover, see Figure 4

on page 7.)

13. Turn the four support adjusters until the adjusters touch the floor.

14. Connect the power cords to printer and 2000-sheet input drawer and power source.

Note: A power cord is not supplied with 2000-sheet input drawer.

178 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

Note: If message display area shows solid rectangles, make sure the I/O cable is

attached firmly to both the 2000-sheet input drawer and the options controller card.

Also make sure the I/O cable connectors are plugged into the appropriate

connector.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed the 2000-sheet input drawer, print a

configuration page. The report should show 2000-sheet input drawer (Tray 3)

installed. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the 2000-Sheet Finisher Option

In the following steps, you will remove the 2000-sheet finisher from packing material

and attach the 2000-sheet finisher to the printer. After removing the accessory box,

check that you have the following items as shown below. (For an illustration showing

key parts, see Figure 3 on page 5.)

Note: Installation instructions are provided with the 2000-sheet finisher. You may use

those instructions or the instructions provided below.

180 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu143

Figure 19. Finisher Parts and Accessories

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. 2000-sheet finisher

Base unit; output trays not installed

2. Stapler cartridge

2000-staple cartridge; pre-installed at factory. (If not, instructions are provided in

“Installing a Staple Cartridge” on page 191.)

3. Output trays (3)

There are three output trays

4. Caution sheet, R-IM-326

Review for safety information

5. Screws (7)

There are seven screws which are used to attach the output trays and guide rail to

the 2000-sheet finisher and printer.

6. Input/output cable

Used to attach the 2000-sheet finisher to the 2000-sheet input drawer.

7. Guide rail

Attaches the 2000-sheet finisher to the printer to provide support.

8. Printer delivery slot adapter

Attaches to printer to help guide paper into the 2000-sheet finisher.

9. Ground adapter

Attaches to printer to reduce electrostatic discharge.

10. Cord holder

Holds I/O cable in place.

11. Installation instructions

Provides information on unpacking and attaching 2000-sheet finisher to the printer.

12. Power cord connector

Provides connector for the power cord.

182 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Unpacking the 2000-Sheet Finisher

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

1. Make sure printer power cord is unplugged and the printer power is off.

2. Remove the shipping package from 2000-sheet finisher.

3. Lift the accessory box out of the carton.

CAUTION:

The 2000-sheet finisher weighs 62 lb (28 kg) and requires two people to carry

the 2000-sheet finisher. Do not attempt to carry the 2000-sheet finisher by

yourself; otherwise injury may result.

4. Lift the 2000-sheet finisher out of the carton in the direction of arrow as shown

below:

5. Remove tape and protective material as shown below:

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Open the front cover and remove spacers. (See Figure 3 on page 5 for locations.)

184 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Attaching Output Trays

Follow these steps:

1. Attach tray as shown and insert the two tabs on the tray into the slots on the

2000-sheet finisher. (Tray should snap into place.)

2. Lower the tray until the tray stops.

3. Attach the screws as shown and tighten the screws with your fingers.

4. Repeat for the other two trays.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Attaching the Printer Delivery Slot Adapter

The printer delivery slot adapter helps position paper correctly from the printer to the

2000-sheet finisher.

1. Remove face-up tray from printer.

2. Insert the delivery slot adapter into the printer face-up delivery slot. (See Figure 5

on page 9 for parts locations.) This adapter goes into the slot where the face-up

tray was attached.

3. Make sure the adapter is seated over the lip (1) on the printer's eject slot as shown

below:

Attaching the Guide Rail

The guide rail attaches the 2000-sheet finisher to the printer. This guide rail must be

installed because the guide rail helps the 2000-sheet finisher to stay in place while

stacking paper. If the guide rail is not installed, the 2000-sheet finisher may shift from

vibration while stacking paper. This can cause paper jams and paper skewing.

186 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important

Make sure the printer and 2000-sheet finisher are on level surfaces and that neither

the printer nor 2000-sheet finisher are at different levels from each other. This helps

prevent paper jams and paper skewing.

1. Place the printer and 2000-sheet finisher approximately one meter (three feet)

apart.

2. Slide the guide rail into the adapter on the 2000-sheet finisher and attach the

screw to fasten the guide rail to the 2000-sheet finisher.

3. Insert the metal part of the ground adapter into the adapter on the 2000-sheet input

drawer.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu296

4. Align and then insert the guide rail into the adapter on the 2000-sheet finisher.

5. Align the 2000-sheet finisher with the printer and slide the 2000-sheet finisher until

the guide rail latches into place on the printer.

188 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Review the following illustration as the completed assembly should appear as

shown below:

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting I/O and Power Cables

1. The 2000-sheet finisher has two I/O connections: an upper 15-hole and lower

14-hole port. The 15-hole port is used to connect the 2000-sheet finisher to the

printer. The 14-hole port is used to connect the I/O cable to 2000-sheet finisher.

2. The I/O cable has two connectors: 15-pin and 14-pin. The 15-pint connector is

plugged into the printer 15-hole connector; the 14-pin connector is plugged into

2000-sheet finisher connector. Review the following illustration to determine the

difference between the 15-pin and 14-pin connectors. The cable connector labeled

15 is a 15-pin connector; the cable connector labeled 14 is a 14-pin connector.

3. Connect the cables as shown below if you are attaching the 2000-sheet finisher to

the 2000-sheet input drawer. If you are attaching the 2000-sheet finisher to the

printer, then attach the cable to the options controller card.

4. Attach the cord holder between the printer and the 2000-sheet input drawer as

shown below. Use the holder to hold power cords and input cables in place.

190 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu298

5. Connect the power cords to printer and 2000-sheet finisher and power source.

Note: A power cord is not supplied with 2000-sheet finisher.

6. After the printer warms up, the READY message displays on the operator panel.

Note: If message display area shows solid rectangles, make sure the I/O cable is

attached firmly to both the 2000-sheet finisher and the printer. Also make sure the

I/O cable connectors are plugged into the appropriate connector.

Important

To confirm that you have correctly installed the 2000-sheet finisher, print a

configuration page. The report will list the 2000-sheet finisher. See “Example 1 —

Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on page 32.

Installing a Staple Cartridge

Follow these steps:

1. Turn printer and 2000-sheet finisher power off.

2. Unplug the printer and the 2000-sheet finisher power cords.

3. Open the stapler cover (1) and review the instructions on the inside of the stapler

cover.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Load a staple cartridge and push the stapler unit back into its original position.

5. Press the test button using a pointed object to place the staples in the ready

position. (This prepares the stapler to begin stapling. If you do not perform this test,

it may take several print jobs before the staples are placed in the proper position

for stapling.)

192 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Close the stapler cover.

7. Plug the power cords back into the printer and 2000-sheet finisher.

8. Turn printer and 2000-sheet finisher power back on.

Installing the Printer Stand

The printer stand supports the printer and provides an area for paper and supplies

storage.

Follow these steps to install the printer stand:

1. Turn printer power off and unplug power cord.

2. Unpack the printer stand.

3. Move the printer stand to the location where you want to locate the printer. Press

down on the casters on the part labeled ON to lock the casters in place. This

prevents the printer from rolling.

CAUTION:

When moving the printer, keep in mind that the back of the printer is heavier

than the front.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION:

The printer weighs 106 lb (48 kg) and requires four people to carry the

printer. Do not attempt to carry the printer by yourself; otherwise injury may

result.

4. Line up the holes on the bottom of the printer with the pins on the printer stand.

194 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Plug power cord in and turn printer power back on.

Chapter 7. Installing Printer Options 195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8. Managing Printer Memory

There are two methods for storing print information, such as fonts, on the printer: hard

drive and printer memory.

Downloading and Managing Fonts

A key use for printer memory and hard drive is storing fonts. Fonts are downloaded

(and removed) to printer memory and hard drive using the printer driver. You choose

download mode from your printer driver and then select one of four methods for storing

the fonts:

1. Temporary printer memory—fonts are stored in DRAM memory until the fonts are

deleted, the printer is turned off, the printer is reset, or the printer is placed in test

mode.

2. Permanent printer memory—fonts are stored in DRAM memory until you delete the

fonts.

3. Flash memory—fonts are stored in Flash memory until you delete the fonts. Keep

in mind that you have 2 MB or 4 MB of Flash memory available for storing fonts. It

is possible to try to store too many fonts in the Flash memory.

4. Hard drive—fonts are stored on the hard drive. You have 810 MB of storage space

for fonts and overlays.

Note: Overlays are also stored in printer memory and hard drive from your printer

driver.

Network Administrator Tip

You can use the Font Installer function from the printer driver to view the fonts that

are stored on the printer. You may want to remove infrequently used fonts to free

up printer memory or hard drive space. (You can also remove fonts using the Font

Installer function.)

Describing Printer Memory

There are two kinds of memory available with this printer: DRAM and Flash.

DRAM Memory

DRAM memory is used to store fonts that are downloaded from the operating system

(this enables fonts to be used that are not resident on the printer). DRAM memory can

be increased to a maximum of 68 MB. DRAM memory is available in 4 MB, 8 MB, 16

MB, and 32 MB SIMMs. There are two slots provided on the printer controller. To install

the maximum amount of memory, you would install two 32 MB SIMMs. Fonts that are

downloaded to DRAM memory can be downloaded temporarily, which means that when

the print job is complete, the fonts are erased. Fonts can also be downloaded

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

permanently, which means that the fonts remain stored in DRAM memory until the

printer is powered off. When the printer is powered off, the fonts are erased.

Flash Memory

Flash Memory is used to store fonts that are downloaded from the operating system

(this enables fonts to be used that are not resident on the printer). Flash memory

enables fonts to be available permanently until you remove the fonts from flash

memory. This is useful if you use a custom designed font or a unique font that is used

in many print jobs. Storing the font on flash memory improves print performance.

Flash memory has an advantage over DRAM memory in that the fonts are not erased,

even if the printer is powered off, until you send a command to the printer to erase the

fonts.

There is one slot provided for flash memory. You can order either a 2 MB or 4 MB

Flash SIMM.

Hard Drive

Supports processing of print jobs and storage of fonts. Fonts can be stored on the hard

drive which enables the printer to print fonts that are not resident on the printer. The

optional 2.5 inch hard drive supplies 810 MB of storage. You can install only one hard

drive on the printer controller. The hard drive can be used with printer memory to

manage fonts and help improve print processing.

If you use many large fonts, such as those fonts that support Japanese (Katakana), you

may want to store those fonts on a hard drive instead of downloading the fonts to

DRAM or FLASH memory.

198 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Estimating Memory Requirements

Memory requirements depend upon many factors which include type of print jobs (such

as a spreadsheet that requires more memory than a simple memo), paper size (larger

paper sizes require more memory), and type of printing (duplex requires more memory

than simplex). Here are some minimum memory requirements:

Table 7. Memory Requirements

Requirement

Simplex

Duplex

PCL Only

PAGEPROT=AUTO

8MB

PAGEPROT=ON (Letter)

PAGEPROT=ON (A3)

Context Saving

6MB

10MB

20MB

14MB

12MB

10MB

PCL and PostScript

PAGEPROT=AUTO

PAGEPROT=AUTO (Letter)

PAGEPROT=ON (A3)

Context Saving

8MB

10MB

20MB

14MB

12MB

10MB

PCL and IPDS

PAGEPROT=AUTO

PAGEPROT=AUTO (Letter)

PAGEPROT=ON (A3)

Context Saving

8MB

12MB

16MB

20MB

14MB

8MB

12MB

10MB

PCL, IPDS, and PostScript

8MB

PAGEPROT=AUTO

PAGEPROT=AUTO (Letter)

PAGEPROT=ON (A3)

Context Saving

16MB

20MB

32MB

14MB

8MB

12MB

10MB

Notes:

1. PAGEPROT is set from the operator panel. PAGEPROT the same as Page

Protection which is described in “Using Memory Reduction Technology with Page

Protection” on page 200.

2. Context Saving is the same as Memory Configuration. Memory Configuration

supports the ability to define whether or not the printer saves datastream

information when the printer is switched between data streams such as IPDS, PCL,

or PostScript.

Chapter 8. Managing Printer Memory 199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Memory Reduction Technology with Page Protection

The printer includes a memory management feature called Memory Reduction

Technology with Page Protection.

Memory Reduction Technology uses the Page Protection function, which you set from

the operator panel as PAGEPROT, to help manage printer memory. The Page

Protection feature provides two values you can select from the operator panel, under

PCL Menu, Page Protect, and PS Menu, Page Protect:

Value

Auto

Description

Reserves minimum amount of memory for a page. The amount of memory

reserved is approximately one-fourth of the page. Auto is the default value.

Reserves enough memory to print entire page. To use this value, you must

have enough memory installed as listed in Table 7 on page 199.

Page protection is used to reserve memory to hold a full page of information. The

memory is reserved until the page is printed. Reserving memory for a page helps

ensure that the page is printed on the printer. This often reduces errors, such as buffer

overrun or memory overflow, which can occur when a large print job is sent to the

printer and the printer tries to print the current page in memory and add a new page to

memory.

An example would be where a large print job with complex graphics is sent to the

printer. When a page that contains a complex graphic is stored in memory, there might

not be enough memory to process that page. Page Protection reserves as much

memory as needed to print the page. No other pages are moved into memory until the

previous page is printed. Without Page Protection, the printer may have printed only

part of the page, or may have run out of memory resulting in a memory overflow error

or buffer full error.

Page Protection can often prevent memory overruns but there are some instances

when Page Protection may not prevent a memory overrun. Here are some examples:

Amount of downloaded fonts exceeds available printer memory.

Page size is larger than expected and there is not enough memory available for

that page size for use with Page Protection..

See Table 7 on page 199 for minimum memory requirements when using Page

Protection.

Network Administrator Tip

Using the Memory Reduction Technology feature with Page Protection enables the

printer to handle larger print jobs with less memory. But you may find that large,

complex, print jobs take longer to print and quality of the print jobs may be

degraded. In this case, you will want to add more DRAM memory to your printer.

200 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9. Setting Printer Network Addresses

Network Administrator Tip

Setting the printer's network address should be performed by a network

administrator or someone familiar with network addresses. Before setting the

printer's network address, review “Defining Network Configuration Tasks” for a list

of network configuration tasks.

Use this section to set the following addresses from the operator panel:

Subnet mask

Gateway

Locally Administered Medium Access Control Address

Note: The Medium Access Control Address (MAC) address is the Globally

Administered Address (GAA). The MAC address can be changed to the Locally

Administered address (LAA) for Token Ring, but not Ethernet.

Defining Network Configuration Tasks

Below are the basic configuration tasks required to install and configure this printer to

work on a network.

1. Verify prerequisites for operating system and application software. See IBM

Network Printers: Ethernet and Token-Ring Configuration Guide for information

on operating system and application prerequisites.

2. Install the printer network interface card. See “Installing the Network Interface

Card” on page 166.

3. Collect network configuration data. See IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and

Token-Ring Configuration Guide for information on collecting data, such as IP

address, needed to configure the printer on a network.

4. Set network addresses. See “Setting IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway

Addresses” on page 203 for information.

5. Install printer driver. Follow instructions included with the printer driver.

6. Define the printer to the network. See IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and

Token-Ring Configuration Guide for information on configuring the network to

recognize the printer.

7. Test the printer. See IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and Token-Ring

Configuration Guide for information on verifying that the printer can print jobs

submitted from network applications.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Administrator Tip

If you installed a Token Ring card, please note that anytime you turn the printer off,

wait at least two or three seconds before turning the printer back on. A quick off-on

may cause the Token Ring card to start beaconing, which is a condition where a

signal is displayed on a Token Ring card when the card detects a problem. If the

printer is turned off and then on too quickly, this may cause the Token Ring card to

detect a false error and begin beaconing.

Using the Operator Panel Keys to Set Network Addresses

Following is a description of how the operator panel keys are used to set printer

network addresses:

Cancel

Press the Menu or Item key to cancel any change or entry

before it takes effect. The change has taken effect if an

asterisk (*) is displayed to the right of the changed value.

Increment

Press the Value key. The value increments by one each time

you press the key.

Fast Increment

Press and hold the Value key. The value increments by ten at

a time while you hold the key.

Decrement

Press the Shift and the Value keys.

Fast Decrement

Press and hold the Shift and the Value keys.

202 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Addresses

This section describes how to set the IP, subnet mask, or gateway address. To change

the MAC address, refer to “Setting the Locally Administered MAC Address (LAA)” on

page 204.

To set an IP, subnet mask, or gateway address for the printer, perform these steps:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer OFFLINE.

2. Press the Menu key until the operator panel displays ETHERNET MENU (or

TOKEN RING MENU).

3. Press the Item key until the operator panel displays the desired address to change,

for example:

ETHERNET MENU

IP ADDRESS

Note: The values that may be shown on the second line of the above example

are:

IP ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK

GATEWAY ADDRESS

4. Press the Enter key. For a new printer whose IP address has not yet been set,

the operator panel displays:

IP ADDRESS

ð<ð.ð.ð ᑍ

The “<” indicates the field whose value you can change at this point.

5. Press the Value key. The asterisk (*) goes away and the value is incremented by

one. The range of the address values is zero to 255.

6. Press the Value key until the desired value is displayed, then press Enter to set

the value. The “<” moves to the next value, for example:

1ð.ð<ð.ð

7. Press the Value key until the desired value is displayed, then press the Enter key.

8. Repeat step 7 until all four values have been set, then press the Enter key to set

the address. The value has been set if an asterisk (*) displays to the right of the

value, for example:

9.99.4ð.2

ᑍ

9. Press the Online button to display the Ready message. The panel displays the

message I/O Initializing and the new addresses are written to non-volatile

memory. (This is where the addresses are stored. Non-volatile memory maintains

information when the printer is powered off.) This process takes a few minutes, do

not power off the printer while the message I/O Initializing is displayed.

Chapter 9. Setting Printer Network Addresses 203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Locally Administered MAC Address (LAA)

Network Administrator Tip

Each printer comes with a unique, pre-assigned MAC address printed on the NIC

faceplate and set the factory. The following procedure allows you to use locally

administered addresses (LAA) instead of the factory value. Resetting the printer to

factory defaults sets the LAA back to the MAC address. IBM recommends that you

use the factory-set MAC address. Also, this feature is only used with Token Ring.

Note: Before using the procedure described in this section, refer to “Using the

Operator Panel Keys to Set Network Addresses” on page 202.

To change the LAA address for the printer:

1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.

2. Press the Menu key until the operator panel displays ETHERNET MENU (or

TOKEN RING MENU).

3. Press the Item key until the operator panel displays the following:

TOKEN RING MENU

MAC ADDRESS

4. Press the Enter key. For a new printer whose MAC address has not yet been

changed, the operator panel displays the unique MAC address that came with the

card, for example:

MAC ADDRESS ð1<

ð4-AC-9A-ðð-ðð

The “<” indicates the value you can change at this point. Notice that the first pair

of values (01, in this case) is shown on the same line as “MAC ADDRESS.”

5. Press the Value key. The asterisk (*) goes away and the value is incremented by

one. The range of the address values is zero to 255 hex (that is, FF).

6. Press the Value key until the desired value is displayed, then press Enter to set

the value. The “<” moves to the next value, for example:

ð4<AC-9A-ðð-ðð

7. Press the Value key until the desired value is displayed, then press the Enter key.

8. Repeat step 7 until all six value pairs have been set, then press the Enter key to

set the LAA address. The value has been set if an asterisk (*) displays to the right

of the value, for example:

MAC ADDRESS ð1-

ð4-9A-ð1-ð2-ð2 ᑍ

9. Press the Online button to display the Ready message. The panel displays the

message I/O Initializing and the new addresses are written to non-volatile

memory. (This is where the addresses are stored. Non-volatile memory maintains

information when the printer is powered off.) This process takes a few minutes, do

not power off the printer while the message I/O Initializing is displayed.

204 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A. Troubleshooting Problems

This section provides simple methods for detecting and solving some of the problems

that most frequently occur in printing environments. If your printer does not print your

job, follow these steps:

1. Turn the printer off and leave it off for approximately 20 seconds. Turn it back on.

This action resets the printer to its programmed configuration and may clear the

error.

2. Print a sample page to determine whether the problem is with the printer or with

the network or cabling leading to the printer. The printer configuration page can be

used as a sample; see “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on

page 32 for instructions. If the problem is with the printer, it is likely that the

printer will not print the configuration page. If the problem is in the network or

cabling leading to the printer, the configuration page will still print.

3. Use the symptom and action table provided in this section to identify and detect

problems.

4. Call your service representative. If you cannot solve a problem, call your point of

purchase or IBM customer technical support at 1-800-358-6661 in the U.S.A. and

Canada.

5. If you need IBM operating system support (for example, AIX, OS/2, OS/400, and

MVS), contact IBM software support (1-800-237-5511 in the U.S.A.,

1-800-465-2222 in Canada).

Locating Printer Serial Number and Machine Type

If you need service on your printer, you will need to provide the serial number and

machine type:

1. Locate the printer serial number which is printed on a barcode label above the

toner cartridge. To find the serial number, open the top cover, and look for the

barcode label. Typically, the serial number is eight digits that start with three

characters. For example, MTC00002, as shown below:

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu210

2. Use 4324 as the machine type.

206 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Use the following table to locate a symptom, such as paper jams repeatedly in printer,

and then perform the suggested action to solve the problem.

Table 8 (Page 1 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

A message appears in the

message display area

See Appendix B, “Understanding Printer Messages” on page 215.

Solid rectangles in the message

display area

This usually indicates a problem with the controller card or one of its

options such as a SIMM or hard drive.

Response: Make sure the SIMMs are in the correct group of sockets and

are installed correctly. See Chapter 7, “Installing Printer Options” on

page 149 for instructions on installing the optional SIMMs and hard drive.

No display messages

No message is in the message display area.

Response: The printer may not be turned on or the power cord has

become unplugged. Press the power switch to power on the printer.

Make sure the power cord is plugged in.

Changed toner cartridge and the

printer does not work

You have installed a new toner cartridge and now want to resume printing,

but the printer will not resume printing.

Response: Turn off the printer. Open the printer and reseat the toner

cartridge. The printer will not print when the toner cartridge is not seated

correctly.

Appendix A. Troubleshooting Problems 207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 (Page 2 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

Printer never prints the job

Responses:

1. Make sure that the printer is running by printing a configuration page.

See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on

page 32. Check the settings for PORT TIMEOUT and

PERSONALTY for possible problems. See the appropriate menu for

information about the settings for your attachment:

“Token Ring Menu” on page 60

“Ethernet Menu” on page 62

“Parallel Menu” on page 55

“Coax Setup Menu” on page 69

“Twinax Setup Menu” on page 71

2. Make sure your printer driver is installed and is connected to the

correct port.

3. For parallel printing, verify the connection by copying a text file (such

as config.sys) to that port. If this file prints successfully, suspect a

driver problem.

Also, make sure you use properly shielded and grounded cables and

connectors. For parallel cable, use IBM part number 63H1994 (also

part number 63H5827) or its equivalent IEEE 1284-1994 compliant

cable.

4. For LAN printing problems, print a configuration page and make sure

the appropriate network interface card is installed (look under

“Installed Options”). If the card does not appear under installed

options, reseat the card (see “Installing the Network Interface Card”

on page 166). If problems persist, you may need a new card.

Also, refer to IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and Token Ring

Configuration Guide, which is shipped with the Ethernet and Token

Ring network interface cards.

5. For twinax/coax printing problems, press the TEST button on the back

of the twinax or coax card to generate an internal configuration page.

This verifies that the card is connected and functional.

Also, refer to IBM Network Printers: Twinax/Coax Configuration

Guide, which is shipped with the twinax and coax network interface

cards.

Output sent to wrong bin

Wrong size paper selected

Check the OUTPUT setting in the Paper Menu. See “Paper Menu” on

page 48. Note that the job value (set using the printer driver or the

application) will override the panel setting.

Check the SOURCE setting in the Paper Menu. See “Paper Menu” on

page 48. Note that the job value (set using the printer driver or the

application) will override the panel setting. Also verify the AUXSIZE and

ENVSIZE values set in Paper Menu.

208 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 (Page 3 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

Paper selected from wrong source

When mismatches occur between size and source (for example, a job

specifies a specific tray and a specific paper size, but the requested tray

does not contain the requested paper size), the printer attempts to satisfy

the size request first. If no tray contains the requested size, a message

may indicate the last tray the printer checked.

Note that the job value (set using the printer driver or the application) will

override the panel setting.

Pages lost after clearing paper jam

Printing is too slow

Set JAMRECOVERY to ON in the Configuration Menu or using the printer

driver. (The driver setting overrides the menu setting.) See

“Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51. Note that this will decrease

performance.

Consider setting JAMRECOVERY to OFF in the Configuration Menu or

using the printer driver. (The driver setting overrides the menu setting.)

See “Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51.

If you have installed extra memory, make sure the printer recognizes it.

Print a configuration page (see “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32). Under “Installed Options” look for

TOTAL MEMORY. If the printer does not recognize all of the memory you

have installed, remove and reseat the memory SIMM. If reseating the

memory SIMM does not correct the problem, replace it.

Added paper and the printer does

not work

You have added or changed paper and now the printer will not print.

Responses:

1. Open and close the printer tray and make sure it is positioned

correctly.

2. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly with paper under the

retaining clips and plastic tabs. Review instructions on the paper tray.

Printer prints wrong font

You started a print job and the font you see is not what you want.

Responses:

1. If you are printing IPDS jobs, see if you have turned on font

substitution (FONT SUB is set to ON on the IPDS Menu). See “IPDS

Menu” on page 75.

2. Print a list of fonts for the type of data you are printing. See PRINT

PS FONTS, PRINT PCL FONTS, or PRINT IPDS FONTS in the Test

Menu (“Test Menu” on page 46).

Note: To print PostScript, the PostScript SIMM must be installed.

To print IPDS, the IPDS SIMM must be installed.

3. The problem may also be with the software; check to see that you

have loaded the correct fonts.

Duplex setting is ignored

The DUPLEX setting on the Paper Menu is the printer default. Your

application or driver settings override this default. Make sure that the

application, driver, or both (if necessary), specify the correct duplex

setting.

Appendix A. Troubleshooting Problems 209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 (Page 4 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

PostScript printing problem

If your printer is not printing PostScript jobs correctly, the printed output

will be unformatted and will include unrecognizable characters (including

%% identifiers and other font information). Some print jobs such as

screen dumps and PCL5e jobs may print correctly.

Response: Print a configuration page. See “Example 1 — Printing the

Printer Configuration Page” on page 32. If the controller recognizes the

PostScript feature, the configuration page will list the PostScript menu

(“PS Menu”) options and Installed options will list “PS.” If there is no

indication of PostScript, remove and reseat the PostScript SIMM. If

reseating the SIMM does not correct the problem, replace the SIMM.

If the PostScript option is listed on the configuration page (indicating that

the SIMM is installed correctly) but the printer still does not print the

PostScript job, make sure you have a PostScript printer driver installed

and that it is connected to the correct port. If the driver is installed and

connected correctly, make sure you have enough memory (see Table 7

on page 199). If you have enough memory, suspect a problem with the

PostScript printer driver or a problem with the print job.

IPDS printing problem

IPDS jobs are not printing.

Responses:

1. Print a configuration page. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32. If the controller recognizes the

IPDS feature, the configuration page will list the IPDS menu and

Installed options will list “IPDS.” If IPDS is not listed, remove and

reseat the IPDS SIMM. If reseating the SIMM does not correct the

problem, replace the SIMM.

2. If you use either an Ethernet or Token Ring connection, make sure

you are configured for TCP/IP. You cannot send IPDS jobs to the

printer using an Ethernet or Token Ring card that is not configured for

TCP/IP. See IBM Network Printers: Ethernet and Token Ring

Configuration Guide for more information about configuring Ethernet

and Token Ring cards.

3. If you use either an Ethernet or Token Ring connection, make sure

the PERSONALTY item in the Token Ring Menu or the Ethernet

Menu is set to AUTO or IPDS. AUTO allows the printer to handle

any data stream; IPDS dedicates the card to IPDS jobs. If

PERSONALTY is set to either PCL or PS (PostScript), you cannot

print IPDS jobs using the card.

4. Make sure you have enough memory. See “Estimating Memory

Requirements” on page 199.

Parallel attachment printing

problems

Make sure your printer driver is installed and connected to the correct

port.

Also, make sure you use properly shielded and grounded cables and

connectors (IBM part number 63H5827 or its equivalent) that are no more

than six feet (1.83 meters) in length.

210 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 (Page 5 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

Poor quality shading patterns

Shading patterns in your printed images are of poor quality.

Response: Make sure the QUALITY item in the CONFIG MENU is not set

to REFINE. See “Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51. Also make

sure your printer driver or printer application is not specifying Edge

Refinement. Values set in print jobs (either by the print application or the

printer driver) override values you set at the printer.

Any print quality problem

The quality of the printed output is not acceptable. Examples of

unacceptable output include light printing, streaks, splotches, random

deletions, blank pages, and so on. See Appendix C, “Solving Print

Quality Problems” on page 235 for samples of print quality problems.

Responses:

1. Print a configuration page. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32. Verify that it has the same print

quality problem. If not, suspect a problem with your job.

2. If printing is light, make sure QUALITY is not set to ECONO. Also,

try increasing the DENSITY setting to a higher value. See

“Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51.

3. Make sure that the paper being used is fresh and dry and meets

specifications. See “Selecting Paper and Other Printable Material” on

page 83 for more information.

4. Install a new toner cartridge. Light prints may indicate that you need

to replace the toner cartridge. See “Changing the Toner Cartridge”

on page 140 for instructions on removing and replacing the toner

cartridge.

If you cannot obtain a toner cartridge immediately, try the following:

Remove the existing toner cartridge from the printer.

Grip it firmly, and rock it side to side (but not upside down) a few

times to spread the toner evenly along the distribution channel.

Reinstall the toner cartridge.

5. If the problem involves spots or streaks, print several test pages to

clean out contamination. If this does not solve the problem, then go to

“Cleaning the Printer” on page 143 for information on cleaning excess

toner from the printer.

6. If the problem is with complex graphics or images and the message

MRT COMPRESSION displays, try changing the PAGEPROT menu

item to ON. This item can be individually set in specific data stream

menus (PCL Menu, PS Menu, or IPDS Menu.) You may need more

memory SIMMs to invoke it. See “Estimating Memory Requirements”

on page 199 for information about memory requirements.

7. Check the page count. See “Machine Information Menu” on page 80.

If you have printed over 350,000 pages, 700,000 pages, and so on,

you may want to consider installing a usage kit. See Appendix D,

“Installing the Usage Kit” on page 241. for more information.

Appendix A. Troubleshooting Problems 211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 (Page 6 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

Blank pages

If all sheets are blank, the toner supply could be low but the toner sensor

is not detecting this condition.

Response: Replace the toner cartridge. See “Changing the Toner

Cartridge” on page 140 for instructions on removing and replacing the

toner cartridge.

Random blank pages during a print job can be caused by multiple sheets

of paper being fed through the machine simultaneously.

Response: Reload the paper tray with fresh, dry paper. Fan the paper

before loading it. If the problem still exists with the new toner cartridge

installed, check the page count. See “Machine Information Menu” on

page 80. If you have printed over 350,000 pages, 700,000 pages, and so

on, you may want to consider installing a usage kit. See Appendix D,

“Installing the Usage Kit” on page 241. for more information.

Paper jams in the printer

repeatedly

Responses:

1. Make sure that the paper tray guides are adjusted correctly for the

size paper you are using.

2. The paper you are using in the printer may not be compatible with

your printer. Verify that the paper you are using conforms to the

specifications for the printer.

3. Check for obstructions in the paper path. Obstructions may include

paper clips and corners of previously jammed paper.

4. Check the paper supply tray for damaged paper.

5. Reload the paper tray with fresh, dry paper. Fan the paper before

loading it.

6. For duplex jams, ensure that the duplex unit is installed correctly.

See “Installing the Duplex Unit Option” on page 171.

7. For envelope jams in or near the fuser, you may need to set the

envelope levers on the fuser to the up position to accommodate

thicker envelopes. See “Setting Fuser Envelope Levers” on

page 126.

See “Selecting Paper and Other Printable Material” on page 83 for more

information.

The printer takes too long to start

printing

The printer is frequently “warming up.”

Response: Change the value for the power-saving mode (or sleep mode)

to a larger value. See “Changing the Power-Savings (Sleep Mode)

Interval” on page 40 for instructions on how to change the setting.

212 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 (Page 7 of 7). Troubleshooting Problems: Symptoms and Actions

Symptom

Action

Test Menu items are not available

If IPDS is the active data stream when the printer is taken offline, the

following Test Menu items will not be available:

CONFIG PAGE

PRINT PS FONTS

PRINT PCL FONTS

PRINT PS DEMO

PRINT SCS CHARS

These items reappear after a port timeout occurs (the length of the

timeout depends on the host or network attachment you use); they also

reappear if you power off the printer, wait ten seconds, and then power

on.

Factory defaults did not get reset

Invoking the FACTORY DEFAULT item on the Test Menu resets most

values to the factory defaults. Some values do not get reset. These

values include LANGUAGE, AUXSIZE, PCL SAVE, PS SAVE, BI-DI, IP

ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, GATEWAY ADDRESS, and MAC

ADDRESS.

Response: To reset all values, do one of the following:

For A4 paper: power the printer off and then power the printer on

while simultaneously pressing the Cancel Print key.

For Letter paper: power the printer off and then power the printer on

while simultaneously pressing the Online key.

Problems with pre-printed forms

Response: Allow 5 mm between printed information and pre-printed lines,

cuts, or perforations on the pre-printed forms.

Appendix A. Troubleshooting Problems 213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages

This chapter lists printer messages that are displayed on the operator panel. The

messages are grouped into these types:

Type

Description

Status

Messages that describe a condition, such as Ready, generally do not

require action on your part. See “Status Messages” on page 216 for a

listing of status messages. Status messages do not have numbers

assigned to the messages, whereas error and service messages have

numbers assigned.

Error

Messages that describe a condition, such as Cover Open, require you to

perform an action, such as closing a cover. See “Error Messages” on

page 221 for a listing of status messages.

Service

Messages that describe a condition where a part has failed or needs repair

and generally requires you to contact service personnel to repair or replace

a part. See “Service Messages” on page 231 for a listing of status

messages.

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Status Messages

COLD RESET A4

Meaning: The printer is powering up and resetting its defaults from a cold

start. A4 size paper has been selected as the default paper size. This

enables you to print a configuration page after the Cold Reset.

Action: None required; however, you need to restore any unique settings

for the printer.

COLD RESET LTR

Meaning: The printer is powering up and resetting its defaults from a cold

start. Letter size paper has been selected as the default paper size. This

enables you to print a configuration page after the Cold Reset.

Action: None required; however, you need to restore any unique settings

for the printer.

CONTEXT SAVE ADJUSTED

Meaning: The printer is configured to use the context saving option (PCL

SAVE and PS SAVE under the Memconfig Menu); however, due to a

configuration change, such as removal of memory, the printer no longer

has enough memory to support context saving.

Action: None required. To restore context saving, add more memory to the

printer. See “Estimating Memory Requirements” on page 199 for more

information.

CONTEXT SAVE CHANGE

Meaning: The values for the PCL SAVE or PS SAVE items under the

Memconfig menu have been changed.

Action: Press the Enter key to accept the new values and continue

printing.

+ FORMAT DISK/- IGNORE DISK

Meaning: You are powering up with an unformatted hard drive, or you

selected the FORMAT DISK action on the Test Menu.

Action: Press the Value key to format the disk. Press the Shift and

Value keys simultaneously to continue as if there were no hard drive

installed.

FLUSHING...

Meaning: The printer is canceling a PCL5e or PostScript job.

Action: None required.

FORMATTING

Meaning: The printer is formatting the hard drive.

Action: None required.

216 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F/W xxxxxxx

Meaning: Unknown message (xxxxxxx can be any alphanumeric value).

Action: Power the printer off, wait ten seconds, and power the printer back

on. If problems persist, call for technical support.

I/O INITIALIZING

Meaning: The network interface card is initializing.

Action: Normally none. If the message remains on the display and nothing

prints, and (a) you have an Ethernet or Token Ring card, and (b) you are

using letter or A4 size paper, make sure your LAN cable is connected and

the network card is seated.

- IGNORE DISK/+ FORMAT DISK

Meaning: You are powering up with an unformatted hard drive, or you

selected the FORMAT DISK action on the Test Menu.

Action: Press the Value key to format the disk. Press the Shift and

Value keys simultaneously to continue as if there were no hard drive

installed.

IPDS COAX

Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the coax interface.

Action: None required.

IPDS ETHERNET

Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the Ethernet interface.

Action: None required.

IPDS TOKEN-RING

Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the token-ring

interface.

Action: None required.

IPDS TWINAX

Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the twinax interface.

Action: None required.

KEY NOT VALID

Meaning: You pressed a key that is not valid.

Action: Press another key. In some instances, you may need to press the

Online key to use other keys such as the Menu key.

MENUS LOCKED

Meaning: The system administrator has locked the menu by issuing a PJL

command from a print job or from an application. You cannot change

values on this menu.

Action: None required.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MRT COMPRESSION

Meaning: The printer is compressing, using Management Reduction

Technology, the page image it is currently printing.

Action: None required.

NEW VALUES AT NEXT BOUNDARY

Meaning: You have taken the printer offline while a job was printing in

order to change a menu value. The new value might not take affect until

the next “job boundary.” Different data streams, in particular SCS, define

job boundaries in different ways, so it may take a while for the new value

to take effect.

Action: None required. If problems occur, make sure you take the printer

offline to change menu values only when no jobs are printing (the printer is

in Ready state).

NONIPDS COAX

Meaning: The printer is receiving SCS or DSC/DSE data through the coax

interface.

Action: None required.

NONIPDS TWINAX

Meaning: The printer is receiving SCS data through the twinax interface.

Action: None required.

OFFLINE

Meaning: The printer is offline.

Action: Press the Online key to make the printer active.

ONLINE HEX PRT

Meaning: The printer is performing a hexadecimal dump.

Action: None required.

PAGES:nnnn

Meaning: This is a response to the PAGE COUNT item on the Machine

Info Menu, where nnnn is the number of pages the printer has printed.

Action: None required.

PCL ETHERNET

Meaning: The printer is receiving PCL5e data through the Ethernet

interface.

Action: None required.

PCL PARALLEL

Meaning: The printer is receiving PCL5e data through the parallel

interface.

Action: None required.

218 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL TOKEN-RING

Meaning: The printer is receiving PCL5e data through the token-ring

interface.

Action: None required.

PLEASE WAIT

Meaning: The printer is processing data and cannot immediately respond

to a request.

Action: Wait until the message clears.

PJL COAX

Meaning: The printer is receiving PJL data through the Coax interface.

Action: None required.

PJL ETHERNET

Meaning: The printer is receiving PJL data through the Ethernet interface.

Action: None required.

PJL PARALLEL

Meaning: The printer is receiving PJL data through the parallel interface.

Action: None required.

PJL TOKEN-RING

Meaning: The printer is receiving PJL data through the token-ring interface.

Action: None required.

PJL TWINAX

Meaning: The printer is receiving PJL data through the Twinax interface.

Action: None required.

POWER SAVER ON

Meaning: The printer is in power-savings (sleep) mode and has temporarily

reduced power. Power will be restored as soon as a job is submitted.

Action: None required.

PS PARALLEL

Meaning: The printer is receiving Postscript data through the parallel

interface.

Action: None required.

PS TOKEN-RING

Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the token-ring

interface.

Action: None required.

PS ETHERNET

Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the Ethernet

interface.

Action: None required.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

READY

Meaning: The printer is ready to receive data.

Action: None required.

RECONFIGURING MEMORY

Meaning: The printer has received a print job that requires the printer to

adjust print settings for the current page based on values used with the

Page Protect function.

Action: None required. The printer reconfigures memory settings to print

the current page. After, the memory settings revert to normal. See “Using

Memory Reduction Technology with Page Protection” on page 200 for

more information.

RESETTING PRINTER

Meaning: The printer is resetting to its default values.

Action: None required.

RESTORING DEFAULTS

Meaning: The printer is restoring the factory defaults for the printer.

Action: None required.

SWITCHING TO IPDS

Meaning: The printer is switching to IPDS.

Action: None required.

SWITCHING TO PCL

Meaning: The printer is switching to PCL5e.

Action: None required.

SWITCHING TO PS

Meaning: The printer is switching to PostScript.

Action: None required.

SWITCHING TO PJL

Meaning: The printer is switching to PJL.

Action: None required.

WARMING UP

Meaning: The printer is warming up. When it is warm, it displays the

READY message.

Action: None required. If the message seems to appear too frequently,

change the value for the power-saving mode (or sleep mode) to a larger

value. See “Changing the Power-Savings (Sleep Mode) Interval” on

page 40 for instructions on how to change the setting.

220 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Messages

The following error messages require operator intervention; they are listed numerically.

02 TONER LOW

Meaning: The toner in the printer cartridge is low.

Action: Check the next several pages of printed output. If the print quality is

acceptable, press the Continue key to clear the message. Ensure that a new

toner cartridge is available. When the print quality becomes unacceptable, install

the new toner cartridge (see “Changing the Toner Cartridge” on page 140).

Note: If the print quality is unacceptable and you do not have a new toner

cartridge, remove the old cartridge from the printer and gently rock it back and

forth. This may temporarily improve the print quality of the old cartridge.

04 TONER CART MISSING

Meaning: The toner cartridge is either missing or is not in place.

Action: Open the printer and make sure the toner cartridge is seated correctly. If

you have not installed a toner cartridge, do so now.

05 LOAD STAPLES

Meaning: The staple cartridge is either missing or is empty in the 2000-sheet

finisher.

Action: Load a staple cartridge in the 2000-sheet finisher. See “Installing a Staple

Cartridge” on page 191.

06 COVER OPEN

Meaning: The top or right cover is open.

Action: Close the cover that is open.

07 FINISHER COVER OPEN

Meaning: One of the 2000-Sheet Finisher covers is open.

Action: Make sure all covers are closed.

08 STAPLE JAM

Meaning: A staple is jammed in the stapler unit.

Action: Open stapler cover and remove staple(s). Follow instructions printed on

label inside the stapler cover or review “Clearing Staple Jams” on page 136.

11 LOAD paper_size IN tray

Meaning: The tray is out of paper or it contains the wrong size paper. The

message identifies the size of paper (paper_size) and the tray (tray) that needs

paper.

Action: If the tray is empty, refill it. The printer resumes printing on its own.

If the printer contains the wrong size paper, you have two choices: to use the

current paper size, press the Continue key; otherwise, load the correct paper size

into the bin.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12 LOAD paper_size IN MANUAL

Meaning: The auxiliary tray requires paper. The message indicates the required

size (paper_size).

Action: Place another sheet of paper or other media in the auxiliary tray and press

the Continue key. If you receive this message and you do not want to use the

manual printing function, set MANUAL to OFF on the Paper Menu. See “Turning

Auxiliary Tray Manual Feeding On or Off” on page 106.

14.1 TRAY 1 IN MOTION

Meaning: Indicates that the paper tray is in motion loading paper. This message

appears after you load paper into paper tray 1 and close the paper tray. For

example, after you load paper into paper tray 1 and close the paper tray, this

message, 14.1 TRAY 1 IN MOTION, indicates that paper is being loaded. When

the message disappears, the printer is ready to print.

Action: None required. If the message does not disappear after approximately 30

seconds, open the paper tray out and make sure paper is loaded correctly. Close

the paper tray. If the message does not disappear after approximately 30 seconds,

call for service, and report this error message.

14.2 TRAY 2 IN MOTION

Meaning: Indicates that the paper tray is in motion loading paper. This message

appears after you load paper into paper tray 2 and close the paper tray. For

example, after you load paper into paper tray 2 and close the paper tray, this

message, 14.2 TRAY 2 IN MOTION, indicates that paper is being loaded. When

the message disappears, the printer is ready to print.

Action: None required. If the message does not disappear after approximately 30

seconds, open the paper tray out and make sure paper is loaded correctly. Close

the paper tray. If the message does not disappear after approximately 30 seconds,

call for service, and report this error message.

14.3 TRAY 3 IN MOTION

Meaning: Indicates that the paper tray is in motion loading paper. This message

appears after you load paper into paper tray 3 and close the paper tray. For

example, after you load paper into paper tray 3 and close the paper tray, this

message, 14.3 TRAY 3 IN MOTION, indicates that paper is being loaded. When

the message disappears, the printer is ready to print. (Paper tray 3 is the

2000-sheet input drawer.)

Action: None required. If the message does not disappear after approximately 30

seconds, open the paper tray out and make sure paper is loaded correctly. Close

the paper tray. If the message does not disappear after approximately 30 seconds,

call for service, and report this error message.

16.1 TRAY 1 MISSING

Meaning: Paper tray 1 is open or not installed.

Action: Open and close the paper tray. If you have not installed the tray, do so

at this time.

222 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16.2 TRAY 2 MISSING

Meaning: Paper tray 2 is open or not installed.

Action: Open and close the paper tray. If you have not installed the tray, do so

at this time.

16.3 TRAY 3 MISSING

Meaning: Paper tray 3 is open or not installed. (Paper tray 3 is the 2000-sheet

input drawer.)

Action: Open and close the paper tray. If you have not installed the tray, do so

at this time.

17.1 DUPLEX OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The duplex unit is not installed properly or has been removed.

Action: Reinstall the duplex unit.

17.2 ENVELOPE OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The envelope feeder is not installed properly or has been removed.

Action: Reinstall the envelope feeder.

17.3 TRAY 3 OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The 2000-sheet input drawer is not installed properly or has been

removed.

Action: Reinstall the 2000-sheet input drawer. See “Installing the 2000-Sheet

Finisher Option” on page 180.

17.4 FINISHER OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The 2000-sheet finisher is not installed properly or has been removed.

Action: Reinstall the 2000-sheet finisher. See “Installing the 2000-Sheet Input

Drawer (Tray 3) Option” on page 174.

20 PAPER JAM

Meaning: Paper has jammed inside the printer. The printer cannot display where

the paper jam is.

Action: Check for the paper jam. Start by opening the top cover, then the right

cover, then the left cover, and then the front cover. For more information, see

“Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

21.1 PAPER JAM CHECK INPUT TRAY

Meaning: Paper has jammed while feeding paper into the printer.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the

right cover to remove this paper jam. For more information, see “Locating Paper

Jams” on page 115.

22.1 PAPER JAM CHECK INPUT TRAY

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred while feeding paper to the printer.

Action: Open the right cover and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open

the right cover to remove this paper jam. For more information, see “Locating

Paper Jams” on page 115.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

23.1 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred near the fuser.

Action: Open the left cover and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the

left cover or top cover to remove this paper jam. For more information, see

“Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

23.2 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred near the fuser.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the

left cover or top cover to remove this paper jam. For more information, see

“Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

23.3 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred at the fuser. Paper may be stuck inside or

wrapped around the fuser.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. (You may need to remove

the fuser and then remove the paper jam.) Usually, you will open the left cover to

remove this paper jam. Also for the printer to recognize that the paper jam has

been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close the top cover. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

24.1 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred near the face down output tray.

Action: Check the face-down output tray as you may be able to remove the paper

jam from the tray. If not, open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you

will open the left cover to remove this paper jam. Also, for the printer to recognize

that the paper jam has been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close

the top cover. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

24.2 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred near the face down output tray.

Action: Check the face-down output tray as you may be able to remove the paper

jam from the tray. If not, open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you

will open the left cover to remove this paper jam. Also, for the printer to recognize

that the paper jam has been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close

the top cover. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

25.1 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred near the point where paper enters the duplex

unit.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the

left cover to remove this paper jam. Also, for the printer to recognize that the

paper jam has been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close the top

cover. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

25.2 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred near the point where paper enters the duplex

unit on inside the duplex unit.

224 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the

left cover to remove this paper jam. Also, for the printer to recognize that the

paper jam has been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close the top

cover. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

26.1 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred in the duplex paper path.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. The printer displays which

cover(s) to open to remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the front cover

to remove this paper jam. Also, for the printer to recognize that the paper jam has

been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close the top cover.) For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

26.2 PAPER JAM OPEN cover

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred in the duplex paper path.

Action: Open the (cover) and remove the paper jam. Usually, you will open the

front cover to remove this paper jam. Also, for the printer to recognize that the

paper jam has been cleared, you may find it necessary to open and close the top

cover. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

27 WRONG PAPER SIZE

Meaning: You attempted to load the wrong size paper in the auxiliary tray. For

example, if you selected 11X17 from the printer driver or application but you

attempted to load legal size paper, the paper may cause a paper jam.

Action: Load the correct size paper as displayed on the operator panel.

28.1 OPT CONTROLLER ERROR

Meaning: The options controller card is installed but the printer is not receiving a

response from the options controller card.

Action: Check that the options controller card is properly installed and all cables

are properly attached. See “Installing the Options Controller Card” on page 162

for more information.

28.2 OPT CONTROLLER COMMUNICATIONS ERROR

Meaning: The options controller card is installed but cannot communicate with the

2000-Sheet Finisher or 2000-Sheet Input Drawer.

Action: Check that the options controller card is properly installed and all cables

are properly attached to the 2000-Sheet Finisher and 2000-Sheet Input Drawer.

See “Installing the Options Controller Card” on page 162 for more information.

29 OUTPUT FULL

Meaning: An output bin or tray is full.

Action: Remove the paper from the output bin or tray.

30 MEMORY OVERFLOW

Meaning: Memory overflow. The printer has received more data from a print job

than can fit into memory.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Action: If the AUTOCONTINU item in the Config Menu is set to ON, printing

resumes in approximately thirty seconds. Otherwise, press the Continue key.

Check the current page for errors.

31 MEMORY ALLOC ERROR

Meaning: The printer cannot allocate the memory required to print a job.

Action: If the AUTOCONTINU item in the Config Menu is set to ON, printing

resumes in thirty seconds. Otherwise, press the Continue key. Check the current

page for errors.

33.1 PAPER JAM CHECK TRAY 3

Meaning: Paper has jammed inside the tray 3 while feeding paper to the printer.

Action: Check for the paper jam inside tray 3. If a paper jam is not visible inside

tray 3, open the paper pickup cover and check for paper jam inside the cover. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

33.2 PAPER JAM CHECK TRAY 3

Meaning: Paper has jammed inside the tray 3 while feeding paper to the printer.

Action: Check for the paper jam inside tray 3. If a paper jam is not visible inside

tray 3, open the paper pickup cover and check for paper jam inside the cover. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

33.3 PAPER JAM CHECK TRAY 3

Meaning: Paper has jammed inside the tray 3 while feeding paper to the printer.

Action: Check for the paper jam inside tray 3. If a paper jam is not visible inside

tray 3, open the paper pickup cover and check for paper jam inside the cover. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

34.1 PAPER JAM CHECK TRAY 3

Meaning: Paper has jammed near the paper pickup cover after exiting tray 3.

Action: Open the paper pickup cover and check for a paper jam. If no paper jam

is visible, open tray 3 and check for a paper jam. For more information, see

“Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

34.2 PAPER JAM CHECK TRAY 3

Meaning: Paper has jammed near the paper pickup cover after exiting tray 3.

Action: Open the paper pickup cover and check for a paper jam. If no paper jam

is visible, open tray 3 and check for a paper jam. For more information, see

“Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

34.3 PAPER JAM CHECK TRAY 3

Meaning: Paper has jammed near the paper pickup cover after exiting tray 3.

Action: Open the paper pickup cover and check for a paper jam. If no paper jam

is visible, open tray 3 and check for a paper jam. For more information, see

“Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

35.1 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred between the printer and the 2000-Sheet

Finisher.

226 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Action: Open the upper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. If no

paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper jam. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

35.2 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred between the printer and the 2000-Sheet

Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. If no

paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper jam. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

35.3 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred between the printer and the 2000-Sheet

Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. If no

paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper jam. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

35.4 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred between the printer and the 2000-Sheet

Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. If no

paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper jam. For

more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

36.1 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access paper cover (top cover) and check for a paper

jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper

jam. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

36.2 FINISHER JAM OPEN TOP COVER

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access paper cover (top cover) and check for a paper

jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper

jam. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

36.3 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access paper cover (top cover) and check for a paper

jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper

jam. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

36.4 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam has occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher.

Action: Open the upper access paper cover (top cover) and check for a paper

jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the lower access cover and check for a paper

jam. For more information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

37.1 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stacked in the output bins.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

37.2 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stacked in the output bins.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

37.3 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stacked in the output bins.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

37.4 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stacked in the output bins.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

38.1 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stapled.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

38.2 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stapled.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

38.3 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stapled.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

228 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

38.3 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stapled.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

38.4 FINISHER JAM

Meaning: A paper jam occurred within the 2000-Sheet Finisher as paper was

being stapled.

Action: Check the output bins for a paper jam. If no paper jam is visible, open the

upper paper access cover (top cover) and check for a paper jam. For more

information, see “Locating Paper Jams” on page 115.

40 MEMORY OPTION ERROR

Meaning: A SIMM module is not properly seated in its slot or is in some other way

defective.

Action: Turn off the printer. Reseat the SIMM module (see “Installing a SIMM” on

page 155). If the message recurs after you restart the printer, call for service.

41 NETWORK OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The printer detected a network interface card, but the card is not

communicating.

Action: Make sure the network card in slot 1 is properly installed and restart the

printer. See “Installing a Network Interface Card” on page 166. If the message

recurs, call for service.

42 NETWORK OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The printer detected a network interface card, but the card is not

communicating.

Action: Make sure the network card in slot 2 is properly installed and restart the

printer. See “Installing a Network Interface Card” on page 166. If the message

recurs, call for service.

43 PS OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The printer has detected a problem in the PostScript module.

Action: Reinstall the PostScript SIMM. See “Installing a SIMM” on page 155. If

the message recurs, call for service.

44 IPDS OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The printer has detected a problem in the IPDS module.

Action: Reinstall the IPDS SIMM. See “Installing a SIMM” on page 155. If the

message recurs, call for service.

46 NETWORK OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The printer has detected that two of the same network cards have been

installed.

Action: Remove one of the cards.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

47 attachment OPTION ERROR

Meaning: The indicated network interface card (attachment) is not communicating

with the printer.

Action: Reseat the network interface card.

230 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Service Messages

The following error messages require service intervention; they are listed numerically.

50.1 ERROR FUSER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Fuser temperature is low.

Action: Call for service.

50.2 ERROR FUSER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Fuser warm-up timeout.

Action: Call for service.

50.3 ERROR FUSER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The fuser is overheating.

Action: Turn off the printer for fifteen minutes and then turn on the printer.

If the message recurs, call for service.

50.4 ERROR FUSER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected a problem with the fuser.

Action: Call for service.

51.1 ERROR SCANNER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Scanner startup failure.

Action: Call for service.

51.2 ERROR SCANNER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Scanner speed failure.

Action: Call for service.

51.3 ERROR SCANNER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Scanner beam error.

Action: Call for service.

51.4 ERROR LASER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Laser beam malfunction.

Action: Call for service.

52.1 ERROR MOTOR CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Motor startup failure.

Action: Call for service.

52.2 ERROR MOTOR CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Motor rotation failure.

Action: Call for service.

53.1 ERROR FAN 1 CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Fan motor 1 has failed.

Action: Call for service.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

53.2 ERROR FAN 2 CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Fan motor 2 has failed.

Action: Call for service.

53.3 ERROR FAN 3 CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Fan motor 3 has failed.

Action: Call for service.

53.4 ERROR FAN 4 CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Fan motor 4 has failed.

Action: Call for service.

54.1 ERROR AUX TRAY CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The lift mechanism for the auxiliary tray has failed. You can

continue to print jobs but do not feed any paper through the auxiliary tray.

Action: Call for service.

55.1 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Delivery motor failure.

Action: Call for service.

55.2 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Stapler unit could not move horizontally because of stapler shift

motor failure.

Action: Call for service.

55.3 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Stapler motor failure.

Action: Call for service.

55.4 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Alignment plate shift motor failure.

Action: Call for service.

55.5 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Vertical movement of output bins failed because of tray unit

elevation motor failure.

Action: Call for service.

55.6 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Either the stapler shift motor or the alignment plate shift motor

has overheated.

Action: Turn printer off for 15 minutes and then turn on the printer. If the

message recurs, call for service.

56.1 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Paper delivery shutter not opening or closing properly due to

either a paper delivery shutter open/close detection switch failure or a

paper delivery shutter open/close sensor failure.

232 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Action: Call for service.

56.2 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Paper delivery swing-guide not opening or closing properly due

to either a paper delivery swing-guide detection open or close switch failure

or a paper delivery swing-guide open/close sensor failure.

Action: Call for service.

57.1 ERROR FINISHER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Paper full sensor failure.

Action: Call for service.

58.1 ERROR TRAY 3 CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Tray 3 paper delivery motor failure. Paper cannot exit Tray 3

input drawer.

Action: Call for service.

58.2 ERROR TRAY 3 CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: Tray 3 paper lift mechanism failure. Paper cannot be fed from

Tray 3 input drawer.

Action: Call for service.

60 ERROR DUPLEXER CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected an error in the duplex unit. You can

continue to print but only simplex pages (one side). You may want to

remove the duplex unit until the problem is solved. By removing the duplex

unit, users will not be able to select duplex from the print drivers or the

operator panel.

Action: Call for service.

61 ERROR CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected an error in the ROM checksum.

Action: Call for service.

62 ERROR CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected an error in the printer controller DRAM.

(This is not SIMM DRAM but DRAM that is part of the printer controller

board.)

Action: Call for service.

63 ERROR CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected an error in the NVRAM (EEPROM).

Action: Call for service.

71 ERROR DISK CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected a hard drive failure.

Action: Call for service.

Appendix B. Understanding Printer Messages 233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

72 ERROR DISK CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected a problem with the hard drive. Hard

drive cannot write data.

Action: Call for service.

73 ERROR DISK CALL FOR SERVICE

Meaning: The printer has detected a problem with the hard drive. Hard

drive cannot read data.

Action: Call for service.

80 ADD MEMORY FOR IPDS

Meaning: The printer requires more memory before it can process IPDS

jobs.

Action: Install more memory. See “Estimating Memory Requirements” on

page 199 for information about IPDS memory requirements.

81 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR IPDS

Meaning: The printer does not have enough memory to process IPDS

jobs.

Action: Power off the printer, wait twenty seconds, and then power on the

printer to clear memory. If the problem persists, you may need to install

more memory. See “Estimating Memory Requirements” on page 199 for

information about IPDS memory requirements.

82 HOST TIMEOUT

Meaning: The coax network interface card has sent an Intervention

Required message to the host. The message is displayed if: A) the printer

is OFFLINE for longer than the HLD TMEOUT setting in the Coax Setup

Menu OR B) the printer has been in an intervention state (such as out of

paper) for longer than the IRQ TMEOUT setting AND C) you have

corrected the problem. For example, if paper is jammed in the printer, the

printer displays a paper jam message. After you correct the paper jam, the

printer then displays 082 HOST TIMEOUT. The 082 HOST TIMEOUT

message is informational and is used to signal the host that a problem

occurred.

Action: When the message is displayed, press the CONTINUE button to

continue printing. You can change the IRQ TMEOUT setting for some IRQ

conditions, such as end of forms, but not for all IRQ conditions, such as a

paper jam. (A paper jam always causes 082 HOST TIMEOUT to be

displayed.)

83 CX SEND STATE

Meaning: Your coax host has placed your printer in “Send State” and is

waiting for the printer to return a PA signal.

Action: Press the Continue key. This sends a PA signal back to the host

and clears the condition. (You may need to press the key more than

once.)

234 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C. Solving Print Quality Problems

Print Is Too Light

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

Print quality is set to

ECONO.

Change print quality to NORMAL.

See “Configuration (Config) Menu” on

page 51.

Density is set too low

Change density value to higher

setting. See “Configuration (Config)

Menu” on page 51.

There is moisture in the

paper

Load fresh, dry paper

The toner cartridge is low

on toner

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

Toner Spots on the Print

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

Paper does not meet

specification

Use recommended paper

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Repetitive Marks on the Print

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

The paper path is dirty

Print several blank sheets of paper to

clear out the dirt

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

Random Deletions or Light Areas on the Print

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

There is moisture in the

paper

Load fresh, dry paper

Paper does not meet

specification

Use recommended paper

The toner cartridge seal is

still in place

Remove the toner cartridge seal

236 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Marks on the Print

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

Vertical Bands of Deletions or Light Areas on the Print

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

The toner cartridge is not

installed correctly

Reinstall the toner cartridge

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

The toner cartridge is low

on toner

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

Appendix C. Solving Print Quality Problems 237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entire Print is Black

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

The printer power supply

has failed

Call for service

Entire Print Is Blank

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

The toner cartridge seal is

in place

Remove the toner cartridge seal

There was multiple sheet

feed

Fan the paper in the tray

The toner cartridge is out of

toner

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

The printer power supply

has failed

Call for service

238 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

White Spots Within Black Image Area

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

Paper does not meet

specification

Use recommended paper

The toner cartridge is

damaged

Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one

Printed Image Rubs Off or Smears

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

There is moisture in the

paper

Load fresh, dry paper

Use recommended paper

Close the top cover.

Paper does not meet

specification

The top cover is not fully

closed

The fuser is not functioning

properly

Check the page count. See “Machine

Information Menu” on page 80. If the

page count is approaching 350,000,

you will want to install a new Usage

Kit. Contact your IBM Authorized

Dealer or IBM Printing Systems

Company Supplies and order one of

the following Usage Kits:

For low voltage: 63H5718

For high voltage: 63H5719

You may need a Usage Kit before

350,000 pages are printed, depending

on the type of paper and the output

being printed.

Appendix C. Solving Print Quality Problems 239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Print Is Damaged

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

Paper does not meet

specification

Use recommended paper

There is excessive

moisture in the paper

Load fresh, dry paper

Damaged paper has been

loaded in the paper tray

The Printed Image Is Blurred

Possible Causes

Actions You Should Take

Print Sample

Paper does not meet

specification

Use recommended paper

There is moisture in the

paper

Load fresh, dry paper

240 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit

If the page count on your printer has reached an increment of 350,000 pages, 700,00

pages, or more, you may need to install a usage kit. The 350,000 page increment is

only a guideline; the usable life of the usage kit depends upon the type of paper and

the types of print jobs you print. If you are experiencing excessive paper jams or very

poor print quality and have printed over 350,000 pages, 700,000 pages, or more, you

may need to replace the usage kit parts.

The usage kit contains these parts:

c9pu215

1. Auxiliary feed pick-up roller (one)

2. Separation pad (one)

3. Fuser assembly (one)

4. Transfer charging roller assembly (one)

5. Pick-up roller (two)

6. Feed and separation roller (four)

Preparing to Install the Usage Kit

To install the usage kit, you need to change the following parts in this order:

1. Auxiliary feed pick-up roller and separation pad

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Fuser assembly

3. Transfer charging roller

4. Pick-up and feed and separation rollers

You will also need access to the following tools:

Flat-bladed screwdriver

Flashlight.

Changing the Auxiliary Feed Pick-up Roller and Separation Pad

Follow these steps:

CAUTION:

Failure to turn off the printer before working with its internal components can

result in electric shock.

1. Turn the printer off-line (1), switch off the printer power (2), and unplug the printer

(3).

twork Pr

owe

int

Online

ttention

Continue

Item

age

ject

Cance

int

Ente

ift

c9pu216

2. Unpack the auxiliary feed pick-up roller (1) and separation pad (2).

c9pu217

3. Open the auxiliary tray (1) and remove the inside cover (2), if present.

242 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu218

4. Locate the auxiliary feed roller and the separation pad.

c9pu219

5. Pinch the roller tabs (1) and slide out the auxiliary feed pick-up roller (2).

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu220

6. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (1) in the slot (2) and gently pry off the separation

pad (3).

c9pu221

7. Insert the tabs (1) of the new separation pad into the lifting plate holes (2). Make

sure the metal strip (3) on the new separation pad faces out.

244 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu222

8. Insert the screwdriver into the slot and gently hold down the lifting plate (1). Slide

the new roller (2) completely onto the shaft (3). It may be necessary to turn the

roller when you first put the roller on the shaft.

c9pu223

9. Lightly pull on the auxiliary feed pick-up roller (1) to make sure the roller is locked

onto the shaft.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu224

10. Replace the inside cover (1), if present, and close the auxiliary door (2).

c9pu225

Changing the Fuser Assembly

1. Unpack the fuser assembly.

246 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu226

2. Open the left cover.

c9pu227

3. Remove the duplex unit, if present. Follow the removal instructions on the front of

the duplex unit.

c9pu228

CAUTION:

High temperature. Allow parts in this area to cool for at least 30 minutes

before you handle them.

4. Turn the two blue lock levers (1) of the fuser assembly in the direction of the

arrows shown below.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu239

5. Grasp the handles of the fuser assembly (1) and slightly lift up the fuser assembly

and pull it out of the printer (2).

c9pu229

6. Locate the grey envelope levers on the new fuser assembly (1) and the grey

envelope levers on the old fuser assembly (2).

c9pu230

7. Adjust the new fuser assembly envelope levers (1) to match the old fuser envelope

levers (2) by placing the levers either up or down. Most often, the levers will be in

the down position. Do not make any adjustments if the envelope levers are in the

same position.

248 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu231

8. Grasp the handles of the new fuser assembly and slide it completely into its mount.

c9pu232

9. Turn the two blue lock levers (1) of the fuser assembly in the direction of the

arrows shown below.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu242

10. Replace the duplex unit, if removed.

c9pu244

11. Close the left cover.

Changing the Transfer Charging Roller Assembly

1. Open the top cover.

c9pu246

2. Remove the toner cartridge.

250 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu247

3. Protect the toner cartridge from exposure to any source of light.

c9pu248

4. Locate the transfer charging roller assembly (1).

c9pu249

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Hold the blue gear (1) with your left hand and the edge of the shield (2) with your

right hand.

c9pu250

6. With your left hand, lift up the blue gear (1) from its clip (2). Hold the blue gear

two or three inches above the clip.

c9pu251

7. Using both hands, slide the transfer charging roller assembly to the left to clear its

right mount (1). Remove the old transfer charging roller assembly.

252 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu288

8. Place the transfer charging roller assembly (1) on a flat surface.

c9pu253

9. Remove the transfer charging roller (1) from the shield clips (2).

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu254

Attention Do not touch the dark part of the new transfer charging roller as oil from

your fingers can cause poor print quality.

c9pu255

10. Unpack the new transfer charging roller.

c9pu256

254 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. Carefully replace the new transfer charging roller into the shield clips (1). Make

sure the metal part (2) of the shield is at the opposite end of the blue gear (3).

c9pu257

12. Pick up the new transfer charging roller assembly from the blue gear (1) with your

left hand and the edge of the shield (2) with your right hand.

c9pu258

13. Using both hands to hold the transfer charging roller assembly, guide the right pin

(1) into its mount (2).

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu259

14. With your left hand, gently push the blue gear into its slot.

c9pu260

15. Gently close the shield until the three latches (1) completely snap into place.

256 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu261

16. Replace the toner cartridge and close the top cover.

c9pu262

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu263

Changing the Pick-up and Feed and Separation Rollers

1. Unpack the pick-up (1) and feed and separation rollers (2). (You should have two

pick-up rollers and four feed and separation rollers.)

c9pu264

2. Open tray 1 (1) until it stops and remove paper.

258 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu265

3. Gently push the latch (1) to the right with your thumb as you pull tray 1 slightly up

and out (2) of the printer.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu267

4. Repeat above steps for tray 2. Both trays should be removed from the printer.

5. The figure below shows the location of the six rollers. You may need additional

lighting to perform this task. The use of a small flashlight (1) would be helpful.

260 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu270

CAUTION:

Pinch hazards and sharp edges are in this area. Be careful.

6. Insert your finger into the hub and press the lock tab (1) of the top pick-up roller (2)

and remove the roller from the printer.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 261

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu271

7. Raise the lever (1). Insert your finger into the hub and press the lock tab (2) of the

bottom pick-up roller (3) and remove the roller from the printer.

c9pu272

8. Slide the new pick-up roller (1) onto the top shaft (2).

262 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu273

9. Raise the lever (1) and slide the new pick-up roller (2) onto the bottom shaft (3).

c9pu274

10. Pinch the lock tab (1) of the top feed and separation roller (2) and remove the

roller from the printer.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu275

11. Pinch the lock tab (1) of the next feed and separation roller (2) and remove the

roller from the printer.

c9pu303

264 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. Pinch the lock tab (1) of the next feed and separation roller (2) and remove the

roller from the printer.

c9pu304

13. Pinch the lock tab (1) of the bottom feed and separation roller (2) and remove the

roller from the printer.

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu276

14. Slide a new feed and separation roller (1) onto the top shaft (2).

c9pu277

15. Slide a new feed and separation roller (1) onto the next shaft (2).

266 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu278

16. Slide a new feed and separation roller (1) onto the next shaft (2).

c9pu279

17. Slide a new feed and separation roller (1) onto the bottom shaft (2).

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu280

18. Lightly pull on each roller to make sure each roller is locked onto the shaft.

268 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu281

19. Identify paper tray 1 (1) and tray 2 (2).

c9pu282

20. Overlap paper tray 1 guide rail arrow (1) on the track arrow (2).

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu283

21. Slightly lift paper tray 1 up (1) as you gently slide it into the printer (2). Repeat

these steps for paper tray 2.

c9pu284

22. Add paper to trays 1 and 2.

270 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c9pu285

23. Plug in the printer (1) and switch on the printer power (2).

c9pu234

Appendix D. Installing the Usage Kit 271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

272 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E. Answering Your Questions

How can I order supplies?

You can order supplies from your authorized IBM dealer or by calling IBM Printing

Systems Company at 1-888-IBM-PRINT.

See “Ordering Supplies” on page 19 for information on ordering supplies.

How can I obtain support?

During warranty period, in Canada and the United States, you can contact your

point of purchase or you can call IBM Monday through Friday, at 1-800-358-6661.

You will need the printer serial number available.

How can I find the printer serial number?

The serial number is printed on a barcode label above the toner cartridge. See

“Locating Printer Serial Number and Machine Type” on page 205 for more

information.

I want to add more memory to the printer. What type of memory do I order?

You can order DRAM and FLASH SIMMs for this printer. Both types of memory

support downloading of fonts and improved print performance. See “Optional

Features” on page 13 for a discussion of optional features including memory and

“Ordering Optional Features” on page 17 for information on ordering memory.

I need to increase the amount of paper the printer holds. What do I need to

order?

You will want to order the 2000-sheet input drawer. See “Optional Features” on

page 13 for a discussion of optional features and “Ordering Optional Features” on

page 17 for information on ordering the 2000-sheet input drawer.

How can I find out how many pages have been printed on this printer?

You can print the printer configuration page which also tells you how many pages

have been printed on the toner cartridge. See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer

Configuration Page” on page 32 for detailed instructions.

How can I find out what version my printer's “operating system” is at?.

You can print the printer configuration page and look under the category called

Code Levels See “Example 1 — Printing the Printer Configuration Page” on

page 32 and “Reading the Printer Configuration Page” on page 34 for detailed

instructions.

I want to use the TonerMiser feature; how do I use this feature?

From the operator panel, under CONFIG, select QUALITY, then select ECONO.

See “Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51 for detailed instructions.

I want to use the Powersaver feature; how do I use this feature?

273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

From the operator panel, under CONFIG, select PWRSAV, then select amount of

time the printer is inactive before the printer goes into a power-savings (sleep)

mode. See “Configuration (Config) Menu” on page 51 for detailed instructions.

I want to set my network address for the printer. How do I do this?

See Chapter 9, “Setting Printer Network Addresses” on page 201 for detailed

instructions.

Where do I send empty toner cartridges for recycling?

Shipping instructions for the empty cartridge are provided with the new toner

cartridge package.

How do I use the stapler feature when the 2000-sheet finisher option is

installed?

Instructions are provided with the printer driver. Each user selects whether to

staple their jobs and what type of stapling they want.

How do I print jobs two-sided when the duplex unit is installed?

You select duplex (two-sided) printing from the print driver. You can also set duplex

from the operator panel in the PAPER menu, select DUPLEX ON. See “Paper

Menu” on page 48 for detailed instructions.

How can I obtain updated software such as printer drivers?

You can go to the IBM Printing Systems Company home page at

http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters and select Printer Drivers/Product Updates to

obtain software, such as printer drivers.

I installed an option but the printer driver does not recognize the option. Do I

need updated printer drivers?

Yes. Whenever you install an option, you should make sure you have the latest

printer driver installed. Updated printer drivers can be obtained from

http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters.

How can I obtain Adobe Acrobat Portable Data Files of this manual?

You can go to the IBM Printing Systems Company home page at

http://www.can.ibm.com/ibmprinters and select Printer Drivers/Product Updates to

obtain documents, such as this manual in Adobe Acrobat Portable Data Files you

can view with Adobe Acrobat Reader.

I have comments about this manual, where can I sent my comments?

You can send in your postage paid reader comment form, or send a fax (US only)

to 1-800-524-1519, or send e-mail to [email protected]. Please include the

form number and publication title.

274 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix F. Specifications

This chapter describes printer specifications.

Printer Specifications

Printing system

Exposure system

Resolution

Electrophotography

Semiconductor laser beam scanning

600 dpi

Warm-up time

Low voltage

Within 70 seconds after power on at 68 degrees F (20° C)

100–120 Volts, 50/60 Hz

High voltage

220–240 Volts, 50 Hz

Maximum power consumption-low

voltage

Operating, normal—584 watts

Power saver on, idle—45 Watts or less

Stand by, idle —Max 205 Watts

Maximum power consumption-high

voltage

Operating, normal—600 watts

Power saver on, idle—45 Watts or less

Stand by, idle —Max 220 Watts

Noise level

Temperature

Humidity

Specifications for the engine are 52 dBA when operating and 38 dBA idle.

Noise level is for base machine with no options installed.

Shipping and storage— −20° to 40° C (−4° to 104° F) For normal

operating— −10° to 32.5° C (50° to 90.5° F)

Shipping and storage— 10 to 95%

Operating or powered off— 20 to 80%

Basic

Dimensions

Width 566 mm (22.3 in.)

Depth 557 mm (21.9 in.)

Height 540 mm (21.3 in.)

With paper handling options:

Width 819 mm (32.2 in.)

Depth 557 mm (21.9 in.)

Height 1,106 mm (43.5 in.)

Weight

Basic printer weight is 51 kg (112 lb.)

Printer with these optional features, duplex unit, envelope feeder, and

2000 sheet input drawer, installed, printer weight is 87 kg (191 lb.)

275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Toner Cartridge Specifications

Temperature for Storage

Humidity for storage

0° to 40°

15 to 85%

Note: The shipping and storage humidity can be between 5 to 15% or 85

to 95% for a maximum of 48 hours only.

Cartridge life

15,000 images at 5% coverage on Letter-size paper.

276 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

The following terms are defined as they are used in this

manual. documentation. If you do not find the term you

need, refer to the index or to the IBM Dictionary of

Computing, ZC20-1699 (Also available from

McGraw-Hill, ISBN 0-07-031489-6 or ISBN

0-07-03189-6) or the IBM Dictionary of Printing,

G544-3973.

setting in the Paper Menu determines if paper is fed

automatically or manually from the auxiliary tray.

B5-size JIS paper. Paper that is 182 mm by 257 mm

(7.17 in. by 10.12 in.).

B5-size ISO paper. Paper that is 176 mm by 250 mm

(6.93 in. by 9.84 in.).

A4-size paper. Paper that is 210 by 297 mm (8.3 x

11.7 in.).

beaconing. A signal repeatedly displayed on a Token

Ring card when the card detects a problem.

A5-size paper. Paper that is 148.5 by 210 mm (8.3 x

11.7 in.).

binder holes. A series of holes or slots punched at set

intervals that allows the form to be inserted in a

loose-leaf or ring binder.

address. Internet address, usually in dotted decimal

notation.

binding. An item in the Paper Menu that specifies, for

duplex sheets, which edge should be used for binding.

LONG binding assumes the sheets will be bound along

the long edge of the paper, SHORT binding assumes

the sheets will be bound along the short edge of the

paper.

adhesive label. Special-application material; typically

consists of paper labels coated on one side with an

adhesive mixture temporarily affixed to backing material.

ASCII. American National Standard Code for

Information Interchange. The standard code, using a

coded character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters

(8 bits including parity check), that is used for

information interchange among data processing systems,

data communication systems, and associated

equipment. The ASCII set consists of control characters

and graphic characters.

bitmapped font. A font in which each character is

defined by a raster bitmap.

bond (paper). Paper formulated with at least 80%

wood pulp. Bond-paper forms work best in the printer.

buffer. A routine or storage used to compensate for a

difference in rate of flow of data, or time of occurrence of

events, when transferring data from one device to

another.

autocontinue. A function activated in the Config Menu

that determines if the printer should resume printing

without waiting for operator responses to certain types of

errors. Examples of the types of errors that use this

function are insufficient memory to print a complex page

or a request to load paper (where printing can continue

using a different size of paper than was specified for the

job).

character set. (1) A finite set of different characters

that is complete for a given purpose; for example, the

character set in ISO Standard 646, “7-bit Coded

Character Set of Information Processing Interchange.”

(2) A group of characters used for a specific reason; for

example, the set of characters a printer can print.

autoswitch. An alternate tray. If an autoswitch tray is

selected for an input tray, that autoswitch tray starts

feeding paper when the original input tray becomes

empty.

coated paper. Paper that has had a surface coating

applied to produce smoothness.

auxiliary tray. The paper source on the front of the

printer that can accept transparencies, paper-backed

labels, envelopes, and card stock as well as paper. A

coax attachment. A coax attachment to the System

370.

277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

coax. A cable consisting of one conductor, usually a

small copper tube or wire, within and insulated from

another conductor of larger diameter, usually copper

tubing or copper braid.

electrophotographic process. The creation of an

image on forms by uniformly charging the

photoconductor, creating an electrostatic image on the

photoconductor, attracting negatively charged toner to

the discharged areas of the photoconductor, and

transferring and fusing the toner to forms.

code page. A font library of hexadecimal identifiers to

graphic characters.

configuration. (1) The arrangement of a computer

system or network as defined by the nature, the number,

and the chief characteristics of its functional units. More

specifically, the term configuration may refer to a

hardware configuration or a software configuration. (2)

The devices and programs that make up a system,

subsystem, or network.

electrostatic image. The invisible image consisting of

discharged areas of the photoconductor as a result of

exposure from digital data.

enable. To make functional. Contrast with disable.

error log. (1) A data set or file in a product or system

where error information is stored for later access. (2) A

record of machine checks, device errors, and volume

statistical data.

connector. A means of establishing electrical flow.

cut-sheet paper. Paper that is cut into sheets.

error-recovery procedure. Procedures designed to

help isolate and, where possible, to recover errors in

equipment. The procedures are often used in

conjunction with programs that record the statistics of

machine malfunctions.

data stream. (1) All data transmitted through a data

channel in a single read or write operation. (2) A

continuous stream of data elements being transmitted, or

intended for transmission, in character or binary-digit

form, using a defined format.

Ethernet. A 10-megabit baseband local area network

that allows multiple stations to access the transmission

medium at will without prior coordination, avoids

contention by using carrier sense and deference, and

resolves contention by using collision detection and

transmission. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple

access with collision detection (CSMA/CD).

default. An alternative value, attribute, or option that is

assumed when none has been specified.

diagnostic. Pertaining to the detection and isolation of

errors in programs and faults in equipment.

disable. To make non-functional. Contrast with enable.

DRAM. Dynamic random-access memory.

face Up. As paper is sent to an output bin or tray, the

printed side is placed face up.

dry ink. The material that forms the image on the

paper. Synonymous with toner.

face down. As paper is sent to an output bin or tray,

the printed side is placed face down.

DSC. 3270 Information Display System data-stream

compatibility.

FGID. Font Typeface Global Identifier. Used with IPDS

to identify fonts, such as FGID 416, which is Courier 10.

DSE. data switching exchange.

duplex printing. Printing on both sides of a sheet of

paper. Synonym for two-sided printing. Contrast with

simplex printing.

flushing. Process of removing data from printer

memory. Flushing is a message displayed on the printer

operator panel to indicate that a PCL or PostScript job is

being cancelled (removed from print memory).

dotted decimal notation. A form of an IP address in

which each byte is represented as numbers, with periods

placed between the numbers such as 123.233.111. 222.

flash memory. A type of random-access storage that

preserves its contents when power is removed from it.

278 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

font. (1) A family or assortment of characters of a given

size and style; for example, 9-point Bodoni modern. A

font has a unique name and may have a registry

number. (2) A font is data used to create an image of

each graphic character; for example, a raster pattern.

another data-processing system; for example, a

computer used to compile, link edit, or test programs to

be used on another system.

format. (1) The arrangement or layout of data on a

data medium. (2) The size, style, type of page, margins,

printing requirements, and so on, of a printed page.

IEEE. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

IEEE 1284-1994. Standard for bi-directional interfaces,

forms. The material on which output data is printed,

such as parellel communcations.

such as paper or adhesive labels. See preprinted form.

image. (1) A string of picture elements organized in

scan lines to represent the contrasting portions of a

picture. (2) A likeness or imitation of an object. (3) In

this printer, an image comprises a string of pels

organized in scan lines to represent the contrasting

portions of a picture. The image may consist of any

data stored as a raster pattern. The term image is

interchangeable with impression and is printed on one

side of a sheet of paper. See also impression.

forms path. The entire route that forms travel during

processing. The forms path usually begins where the

forms are loaded and ends at the stacker. Synonym for

paper path.

fuse. To use heat and pressure to blend toner onto

forms to make a permanent bond.

fuser. The assembly that bonds the toned image to the

paper, using heat and pressure.

impression. An implied or physical page. Used when

calculating the reduction of printer output caused by

switching the printer between duplex and simplex modes

or upper and lower paper supplies. See also image.

graphic. A symbol produced by a process such as

handwriting, drawing, or printing. See also vector

graphics.

Intelligent Printer Data Stream. An architected

host-to-printer data stream that contains both data and

controls defining how the data (text, image, graphics,

and bar code) is to be presented. IPDS provides a

device-independent interface for controlling and

managing all-points addressable printers.

graphic character. A character that is normally

represented by a graphic, independent of code points or

fonts. A graphic character is often in the form of a

spatial arrangement of adjacent or connected strokes;

for example, a letter or digit.

interface. A shared boundary. An interface might be a

hardware component to link two devices or it might be a

portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more

computer programs.

internet. Any interconnected set of networks.

hard drive. A standalone disk drive that reads and

writes data on rigid disks and can be attached to a port

on the printer. Synonymous with fixed disk drive, hard

disk drive.

internet address. An assigned number indentifying a

port on an internet. The address has two or three parts:

network number, optional subnet (mask), and host

number.

hardware address. The low level address used by

IP. Internet Protocol. In TCP/IP, a protocol that routes

data from its source to its destination in an Internet

environment. You set the IP address on the printer's

operator panel so that print jobs can be routed to the

printer.

physical networks. Also known as the MAC address.

Hewlett-Packard Printer Command Language

(HP-PCL). A data stream used for printing on

Hewlett-Packard laser printers and compatible printers.

host system. (1) The primary or controlling computer

in a multiple-computer installation. (2) A computer used

to prepare programs for use on another computer or on

IP address. Internet Protocol Address. The notation in

dotted decimal format, such as 9.99.123.89 that uniquely

identifies a node (or printer) on a network.

Glossary 279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IPDS. See Intelligent Printer Data Stream.

intervention. An unexpected condition that requires

network interface cards. Optional features that allow

the printer to attach to computer networks. The printer

can have up to two network interface cards installed,

allowing it to communicate with two networks.

user intervention to clear it, for example, out of toner.

ISO sizes. Pertaining to a set of paper sizes selected

from those standardized by the International

Organization for Standardization (ISO) for use in data

processing.

offline. Not connected to an installed and enabled

attachment. Contrast with online.

jam. In a printer, a condition where forms have become

blocked or wedged in the forms path so the printer

cannot operate.

offset stacking. The jogged stacking of output media

in the output stacker so that jobs protrude from the

balance of the stack to give physical identification.

JIS. Japanese Industry Standards. Used in reference

to paper standards for size.

online. Connected to an installed and enabled

attachment. Contrast with offline.

orientation. The number of degrees an object is

rotated relative to a reference; for example, the

orientation of an overlay relative to the page point of

origin. See also text orientation.

landscape orientation. Text and images that are

printed parallel to the longer side of the forms. Contrast

with portrait orientation.

output bin. The part of the printer where the printed

sheets are collected.

laser (light amplification by stimulated emission of

radiation). A device that emits a beam of coherent

light.

outline font. A font whose graphic character shapes

are defined by mathematical equations rather than by

raster patterns. Contrast with raster font.

legal-size paper. Paper that is 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5

in. x 14.0 in.).

overrun condition. Loss of data because a receiving

device is unable to accept data at the rate it is

transmitted.

letter-size paper. Paper that is 216 mm x 279 mm (8.5

in. x 11.0 in.).

logical page. The print on the page, such as

composed text, graphics, and fonts within defined

margins. See also page. Contrast with physical page.

page. A collection of information bound by the

beginning page control and its associated end control. A

page of printing is one side of a sheet of paper or form.

See also logical page and physical page.

MAC. Medium Access Control. A unique address

associated with a network interface card.

paper path. The entire route that forms travel while

they are being processed. The paper path usually

begins where the forms are loaded and ends at the

stacker.

MRT compression. Memory Reduction Technology

algorithms to compress printed pages into smaller

memory space.

parallel port. An access point through which a

computer transmits or receives data that consists of

several bits sent simultaneously on separate wires.

280 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL5e. Hewlett-Packard's Printer Command Language,

print position. The physical positions of the characters

a data stream used for printing.

constituting a print line relative to the form.

pel (picture element). (1) An element of a raster

pattern; a point where a toned area on the

photoconductor may appear. (2) On an

print quality. The quality of printed output relative to

existing standards and in comparison with jobs printed

earlier.

all-points-addressable output medium, each pel is an

addressable unit. On a row-column addressable output

medium, the only pel addressable is the beginning of a

character cell.

print surface. The side of a form that receives the

printed image.

printable area. The area on a sheet of paper where

print can be placed.

photoconductor. The material that is used as the

medium for transferring images to paper.

physical page. The form on which the printer is

printing, such as an 8-1/2 x 11-inch sheet of paper. See

also page. Contrast with logical page.

raster. (1) In computer graphics, a predetermined

pattern of lines that provides uniform coverage of a

display space. (2) The coordinate grid that divides the

display area of a display device. (3) In this printer, an

on/off pattern of electrostatic images produced by the

laser print head under control of the character generator.

pitch. A unit of measurement for the width of a printed

character. It identifies the number of graphic characters

per inch; for example, 10-pitch has ten graphic

characters per inch. Uniformly spaced fonts are

measured in pitches. Contrast with point.

raster font. A font in which each character is defined

point. A unit of measurement for describing type sizes.

There are 12 points to a pica, about 72 points to an

inch.

by a raster bitmap.

raster pattern. A series of picture elements (pels)

arranged in scan lines to form an image.

point of origin. The location of the first print position

on a logical page. The point of origin is usually stated in

terms of X and Y coordinates. The point of origin used

by a printer can be affected by factors such as printable

area and forms orientation.

raster scan. A technique of generating or recording the

elements of an image by a line-by-line sweep across the

entire output medium.

resident font. Those font data sets that are resident

within the printer. They usually reside on the printer disk

media (diskette or hard disk). These font sets are

usually commonly used fonts. Having them resident

reduces font load time. These fonts may also be used

during offline testing of the printer.

portrait orientation. Pertaining to a display or hard

copy with greater height than width. Contrast with

landscape orientation.

PostScript. (1) A page description language with

interactive graphics capabilities that was developed by

Adobe Systems, Inc. (2) An interpretive programming

language that describes the appearance of text,

graphical shapes, and sampled images on a printed

page by defining a print file format that is the interface

between document composition applications and raster

printing devices.

scalable font. A font whose graphic characters are

represented by mathematical equations and can be

sized to different heights.

preprinted form. A sheet of forms containing a

preprinted design of constant data with which variable

data can be combined. See also forms.

SCS. See SNA character string.

SIMM. Single inline memory module.

Print-Error Marker (PEM). Small, black, rectangular

marks that indicate incorrectly placed data in the valid

printable area.

simplex printing. Printing on one side of a sheet of

paper. Contrast with duplex printing.

Glossary 281

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SNA character string. In SNA, a character string

composed of EBCDIC controls, optionally intermixed with

end-user data, that is carried within a request/response

unit.

toner density. The amount of toner dispersed over a

specified area. Higher toner density yields darker print;

lower toner density produces lighter print.

trailing edge. The trailing edge of the paper is the

edge of the paper that proceeds into the printer last as it

is fed from one of the paper supplies.

skew. Refers to the paper going through the paper

path at a slight angle. This will cause the printing lines

to not be aligned properly.

twinax attachment. A twinax attachment to the

stacker. A device used to hold paper or forms that

AS/400.

have been printed; the output device of a printer.

twinax. A cable consisting of two conductors, usually

small copper tubes or wires insulated from each other,

within and insulated from another conductor of larger

diameter, usually copper tubing or copper braid. This

type of cable is often used to attach printers to an

AS/400 system.

storage. (1) The retention of data in a storage device.

(2) In word processing, a unit into which recorded text

can be entered, in which it can be retained and

processed, and from which it can be retrieved. (3) A

device, or part of a device, that can retain data.

symbol set. In PCL5e, a particular assignment of

hexadecimal identifiers to graphic characters.

two-sided printing. Printing on both sides of a sheet of

paper. Synonymous with duplex printing. Contrast with

simplex printing.

text orientation. The position of text as a combination

of print direction and baseline direction. See also

orientation.

valid printable area. The area represented by the

intersection of the physical page and the current logical

page. You can use the VPA CHK item on the IPDS

Menu to specify if attempts to print outside this area

cause errors to be reported to the host.

throughput. A measure of the amount of work

performed by the printer over a period of time, for

example, number of jobs per day.

vector graphics. Computer graphics in which display

images are generated from display commands and

coordinate data. See also graphic. Contrast with raster

pattern.

token ring. A network with a ring topology that passes

tokens from one attaching device to another, for

example, the IBM Token-Ring Network.

toner. (1) In a document-printing machine,

image-forming material used in electrostatic processes.

(2) A supply item for the printer. The black powder used

for printing images. Synonymous with dry ink.

xerographic paper. A paper that is manufactured

specifically for the xerographic process, in which key

paper qualities are carefully controlled.

282 User's Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

bins (continued)

Numerics

selecting default 49

blinking lights

See indicator lights

boxes in message display area 207

BUFFERSIZE

2000-sheet finisher paper path 113

2000-sheet finisher, input cover 12

2000-sheet finisher, lower paper access cover 12

2000-sheet finisher, stapler 12

2000-sheet finisher, top cover 12

2000-sheet finisher, upper paper access cover 12

2000-sheet input drawer, installing 174

4324 machine type 205

Coax Setup Menu item 69

Twinax Setup Menu item 72

BUSY TMEOUT, Coax Setup Menu item 69

buttons, operator panel

See keys, operator panel

APO

adjusting

CANCEL CX HEX, Test Menu item 47

CANCEL ONLN HEX, Test Menu item 47

Cancel Print key 30

CANCEL TX HEX, Test Menu item 47

canceling print jobs 38

card, installing 162

CASE, Coax SCS Menu item 65

changing toner 140

cleaning the printer 143

clearing paper jams 109

2000-sheet finisher 113

error messages 115

printer paper path 109, 110

tray 3 paper path 112

coax attachment, installing 166

Coax DSC/DSE Menu 73

Coax SCS Menu 64

Coax SCS Menu item 65

Twinax SCS Menu item 68

Attention indicator light 29

AUTO FUNCTION, Coax DSC/DSE Menu item 74

autocontinue function 52

AUTOCONTINUE, config Menu item 52

automatic print orientation

coax SCS 65

twinax SCS 68

AUX

Coax SCS Menu item 64

Paper Menu item 50

Twinax SCS Menu item 67

auxiliary tray